As we approach the financial year end, it’s crucial to ensure that you complete all of your financial tasks before the deadline to avoid any fines or penalties.
Here’s a list of essential tasks which cover financial timelines that must be completed by March 31, 2024:
Applicable for Individuals
Tax Saving Investments: This is applicable to individuals opting for the old tax regime under income tax. March 31, 2024, is the cutoff date for making all your tax-saving investments such as LIC premium, Public Provident Fund, ELSS, National Pension Scheme, Donations, etc. for claiming Donations under section 80C, 80D, 80G, 80GGB, etc., for F.Y. 2023-24.
Investment Declarations: March 2024, is the final month for submitting the Investments & Expenses proofs to the employer. Failure to do so will result in the deduction of higher TDS from Salary. Employers usually keep a deadline of February 15 or March 15 for submissions of investment declarations to consider while processing the payroll for the month of March.
Applicable for Companies
Filing of PTRC Returns for the State of Maharashtra: The Annual PTRC returns for the state of Maharashtra for the period March 2023 to February 2024 should be filed on or before March 31, 2024, to avoid a penalty.
Provision of Expenses in the Books: Ensure that all your expenses related to FY 2023-24 are provided in the books before March 31, 2024 and relevant TDS payments on those expenses are done as per the applicable due dates.
Applicable for Individuals, Firms and Companies
Payment of Advance Tax:
The last date for payment of fourth installment of advance tax (if applicable) for FY 2023-24 is March 15, 2024.
For Professionals and Business paying taxes on presumptive income under section 44ADA and 44AD of the Income Tax Act respectively, the due date for payment of advance tax for FY 2023-24 is March 15, 2024.
Updated Return (ITR-U): The Finance Act of 2022 introduced a new provision of “Updated Return,” which gives an opportunity to the assessee to rectify their mistakes or omissions, if they missed out on declaring some income. This updated return can be filed within two years from the end of the relevant assessment year. Therefore, March 31, 2024, is the last date to file the updated return in ITR-U for FY 2020-21 (AY 2021-22).
In the bustling corporate landscape of India, companies thrive on the dedication and expertise of their employees. However, with great power comes great responsibility, and the actions, or sometimes, even the lack thereof, of an employee can have significant legal ramifications for the company itself. This post aims at explaining the legal implications a company can face on behalf of its employees, and summarizing the legal concepts underlying the same.
Vicarious Liability: Carrying the Weight of Another’s Wrongdoing
The concept of vicarious liability, or imputed liability, forms the bedrock of understanding a company’s accountability for employee conduct. Stemming from the Latin phrase “Respondeat Superior” which translates to “let the master answer” this principle holds an employer liable for the torts (civil wrongs) committed by their employees while acting within the scope of their employment. The basis of holding a company vicariously liable for the actions or inactions of its employees is that employers are in a position to limit and/or curtail such actions or inactions. However, it often becomes practically difficult to determine situations where an employee acted within the scope of their employment.
Scope of Employment: Defining the Line between Work and Personal
Determining whether an employee’s actions fall within the scope of employment is crucial in establishing vicarious liability of the employer. Generally, acts undertaken:
During work hours,
At the place of work,
While performing duties assigned by the employer/company, or
While furthering the employer/company’s interest, are considered to be within the scope of an employee’s employment.
However, exceptions exist for the following:
Frolic and Detour: Acts of an employee that are motivated by personal agendas, and completely deviating from the duties and responsibilities of the employee, as determined by the company, fall outside the scope of his/her employment.
Intentional Torts: Malicious and intended acts of an employee that exceed the boundaries of reasonable conduct expected from them are deemed outside the scope of their employment,
Beyond Civil Wrongs: The Shadow of Criminal Liability
In certain situations, a company can also face criminal liability for the actions of its employees. The Indian Penal Code, 1860, outlines specific offenses where a company can be held accountable for offenses committed by employees. These include situations where:
The offense was committed by the employee for the company’s direct or indirect benefit.
The offense was committed by the employee with the knowledge or consent of the company’s management.
The offense committed by the employee was facilitated by a lack of proper due diligence or oversight by the company.
Proactive Measures: Shielding the Company from the Storm
While the law holds companies accountable for employee conduct, proactive measures can mitigate the risk of legal and financial repercussions. These include:
Robust Employee Training: Regularly training employees on company policies, ethical conduct, and legal compliance can minimize the chances of misconduct.
Clear Codes of Conduct: Establishing and disseminating clear codes of conduct outlining acceptable and unacceptable behavior provides a framework for employee actions.
Effective Supervision: Implementing proper supervision and monitoring systems can help identify and address potential issues before they escalate.
Adequate Insurance Coverage: Investing in comprehensive liability insurance can provide financial protection against legal claims arising from employee actions.
Navigating the Legal Labyrinth: Seeking Expert Guidance
The legal landscape surrounding company liability for employee actions can be complex and nuanced. It is crucial for companies to seek the guidance of experienced legal counsel to deal with such scenarios as well as while framing its internal policies to minimize the risk of attracting such liability. Indian courts have, from time to time, set out certain guardrails and principles to address the issue of employers’ liabilities for their employees, which form the basis of the concept of vicarious liability in India.
Landmark Judgments
State of Rajasthan v. Mst. Vidhyawati & Anr. (1962): The Hon’ble Supreme Court held that the State of Rajasthan was vicariously liable for the tortious act of its employee who carried out such act during the course of his employment, despite the State not directly authorizing or condoning the act so carried out by the employee. It was also held that the liability of the State in such matters would be the same as any other employer, and that the State would not enjoy any immunity in matters of vicarious liability.
State Bank of India v. Shyama Devi (1978): The respondent gave some cash and a cheque to her husband’s friend, who was an employee of the appellant bank, for depositing the same in her account. No receipt or voucher was obtained indicating the said deposit. The employee, instead of making the deposits in the respondent’s account, got the cheque cashed and misappropriated the amounts. To cover up his act, the employee made false entries in the respondent’s passbook. The Hon’ble Supreme Court held that the employee had acted outside the scope of his employment and without the directions, orders or knowledge of the bank. Hence, the appellant bank was not held liable for the fraud committed by its employee in this matter.
State of Maharashtra & Ors. v. Kanchanmala Vijaysingh Shirke & Ors. (1995): In this matter, Vijaysingh died in an accident when a jeep, which belonged to the State, dashed against his scooter. The 3rd appellant was the driver of the jeep but at the time of the accident, the 4th respondent, who was then a clerk in a separate department of the State Government, was driving the jeep. The State contended that since the act was not authorized by it, the State could be held vicariously liable. The Bombay High Court affirmed this stance and penalized only the 4th respondent. The Hon’ble Supreme Court, while overruling the High Court’s decision, held that the accident took place when the act authorised by the State was being performed in a mode which may not be proper but nonetheless it was directly connected with ‘the course of employment’ and it was not an independent act for a purpose or business which had no nexus or connection with the business of the State so as to absolve the appellant-State from the liability. Further, it was held that in its capacity as an employer, the State has to shoulder the responsibility on a wider basis and will be responsible to third parties for acts which it has expressly or implicitly forbidden its servant (the driver) to do.
Anita Bhandari v. Union of India (2002): In this matter, the husband of the petitioner went to a bank and happened to enter at the same time as the cash box of the bank was being carried inside the bank. The security guard thought of him as an attacker and shot him, causing his death. The petitioner claimed that the bank was vicariously liable because the security guard had done such an act in the course of his employment. Despite the bank’s defense that it had not authorized the security guard to shoot, the Gujarat High Court opined that the act of giving the guard a gun amounted to authorizing him to shoot when he deemed it necessary.
M Anumohan v. State of Tamil Nadu & Ors. (2016): The State was held liable for the acts of a police officer who falsely implicated certain individuals under the NDPS Act, 1985, and attempted to blackmail victims and extort money from them. The Court emphasized that acts directly connected with authorized acts that can be carried out by a police officer would be within the course of employment and held that the act of filing a false complaint is directly connected to an authorized act by the State and hence, vicarious liability for such matters can be attached to the State.
Examples
Here are some examples to illustrate where the line is drawn in cases pertaining to vicarious liability of a company/employer:
Company Liable: a) Delivery driver causing an accident while on a delivery route – The driver is acting within the scope of employment, fulfilling company duties and hence, the company is vicariously liable for the driver’s act. b) Security guard assaulting a customer in the company parking lot – This act, though wrong, falls within the guard’s responsibility to maintain safety on company premises, and therefore, the company would be held vicariously liable.
Company not Liable: a) Employee getting into a car accident after work hours while driving their own car – The act is purely personal and outside the scope of the employee’s employment. Hence, the company will not be liable here. b) Salesperson making offensive jokes to a client at a bar after work – Though inappropriate, the act doesn’t involve company time, resources, or duties, and the company will not be held liable.
Understanding and managing the potential liabilities arising from employee conduct is an essential aspect of responsible corporate governance in India. By implementing proactive measures and fostering a culture of ethical conduct, companies can create a safe and compliant work environment while minimizing the risk of legal entanglements. Remember, an ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure. By prioritizing employee training, clear policies, and effective supervision, companies can not only safeguard their legal standing but also foster a more ethical and productive work environment for all.
Conclusion
The concept of company liability for employee actions in India is a complex and evolving landscape. Rooted in principles of vicarious liability, the extent of an employer’s responsibility rests on a delicate balance that takes into account factors like the nature of the employee’s wrongful act, the scope of their employment, and the connection between the action and the employer’s enterprise.
The cases and legal principles discussed in this analysis highlight the nuances involved. Employers carry a substantial burden to ensure that their workplaces are safe, free from discrimination, and operate within a framework of ethical conduct. Understanding the legal nuances of employer liability in India is not only a matter of compliance but a fundamental aspect of responsible business operation and risk management.
Robust Policies and Procedures: Implement clear and comprehensive policies addressing workplace harassment, discrimination, data protection, and other areas of potential risk. These policies should clearly define acceptable and unacceptable behaviours, provide mechanisms for grievance redressal, and outline the company’s commitment to upholding ethical behaviour.
Thorough Training and Education: Conduct regular training programs to educate employees on their responsibilities under company policies, as well as relevant labour and anti-discrimination laws. Training should not only convey rules but also help employees understand the principles behind them and the real-world impact of their actions.
Effective Reporting and Investigation Mechanisms: Establish channels for employees to report concerns or suspected violations without fear of retaliation. Investigate all allegations promptly and thoroughly, taking corrective action where necessary.
Due Diligence in Hiring: Conduct thorough background checks for potential hires, especially for sensitive positions. Consider not only technical skills but also integrity, past conduct, and suitability for the company culture.
Proactive Risk Management: Identify potential areas of risk within the company’s operations and implement measures to mitigate those risks. This includes potential risks related to employee interactions with clients, handling sensitive data, and the use of company resources.
Insurance Coverage: Explore relevant insurance products to cover potential liabilities arising from employee actions.
FAQs on the Burden of the Employer: A Look at Company Liabilities for Employee Action in India
What is the concept of vicarious liability and how does it apply to companies in India? Vicarious liability holds employers responsible for the torts (civil wrongs) committed by their employees while acting within the scope of their employment. This means the company can be sued for the employee’s actions, even if the company didn’t directly authorize them.
What factors determine whether an employee’s action falls within the scope of their employment? Generally, actions undertaken during work hours, at the workplace, while performing assigned duties, or furthering the company’s interests are considered within the scope of employment. However, exceptions exist for personal errands, intentional torts exceeding expected conduct, and actions outside working hours.
Can companies ever be criminally liable for employee actions in India? Yes, under certain circumstances. The Indian Penal Code outlines specific offenses where companies can be held accountable for employee actions, such as when the act benefits the company directly or indirectly, is committed with the management’s knowledge or consent, or results from a lack of proper oversight by the company.
What proactive measures can companies take to minimize the risk of legal repercussions from employee actions?
Implement robust employee training on company policies, ethics, and legal compliance.
Establish and disseminate clear codes of conduct outlining acceptable and unacceptable behaviour.
Implement effective supervision and monitoring systems to identify and address potential issues.
Invest in comprehensive liability insurance to provide financial protection against legal claims.
What are some landmark judgments in India that have shaped the understanding of vicarious liability?
State of Rajasthan v. Mst. Vidhyawati & Anr. (1962): Established the principle of vicarious liability for employers even without directly authorizing the employee’s act.
State Bank of India v. Shyama Devi (1978): Highlighted that acting outside the scope of employment, without the company’s knowledge, exempts the company from liability.
State of Maharashtra & Ors. v. Kanchanmala Vijaysingh Shirke & Ors. (1995): Clarified that unauthorized acts directly connected to authorized duties can still attract liability.
Can you provide some examples to illustrate theconcept of vicarious liability in action?
Company Liable: A delivery driver causing an accident while on duty, or a security guard assaulting a customer at work.
Company Not Liable: An employee’s car accident after work or a salesperson making offensive jokes to a client outside work hours.
What are the key takeaways for companies regarding employee conduct and associated liabilities? Understanding and managing potential liabilities is crucial for responsible corporate governance. Companies can minimize risks by prioritizing employee training, clear policies, and effective supervision, fostering a culture of ethical conduct, and adhering to relevant legal guidelines.
An officer-in-default is a person associated with a company who is held liable for any penalty or punishment in case of default committed by the company under the Companies Act, 2013.
Who is qualified as an officer in default? Section 2(60) of the Companies Act 2013 makes provision for identifying specific persons who may be held liable in case of a default by the company:
Based on an article published in Economic Times (ET Article Link – https://lnkd.in/dVUdVza8), MNCs might be facing a retro tax demand of INR 11,000 Cr following a Supreme Court ruling on the interpretation of the MFN clause included in various Indian tax treaties.
So, what is the MFN clause, and how does the Supreme Court ruling impact existing arrangements entered into between group companies of MNCs?
The MFN clause allows for a reduction in the TDS rates on dividends, interest, royalties, or fees for technical services (FTS), as applicable. Also, it can limit the scope of royalty/FTS (for example, make available) in the treaty entered with the First Country. These adjustments only come into play if, at a later date, such concessions are extended by India to another OECD member (Third Country).
Example
1986 DTAA notified between India and Canada (First Country) which contained the MFN provision.
1988 DTAA entered between India and Sweden (OECD member) which contained more favourable benefits than what was given to Canada.
1992 CBDT amended the DTAA with Canada (First Country) under section 90 to extend beneficial provisions present in the India-Sweden DTAA (Third Country).
What was happening?
The bilateral treaties between India and the Netherlands, France, and Switzerland contained the MFN clause.
Entities based in the Netherlands, France, and Switzerland automatically claimed the beneficial provisions present in subsequent tax treaties signed by India with Third Countries, based on the MFN clause in their respective DTAAs with India.
Certain Third Counties were not an OECD member at the time of signing the DTAA with India and became OECD members later.
Example
DTAA entered between India and Slovenia contained lower tax rate of 5% on Dividend.
India-Slovenia DTAA came into force on Feb 17, 2005.
Slovenia became an OECD member on July 21, 2010. Entities from the First Country with whom India had entered into DTAA before Slovenia (Third Country) claimed beneficial provisions present in the India-Slovenia DTAA under the MFN clause automatically without CBDT notification.
Supreme Court Ruling –
Issues raised
Whether there is any right to invoke the MFN clause when the Third Country with which India has entered into a DTAA was not an OECD member at the time of entering into such DTAA?
Whether the MFN clause is to be given effect to automatically or if it is to only come into effect after a notification is Issued.
Held
Notification under Section 90(1) is necessary and a mandatory condition for a court, authority, or tribunal to give effect to a DTAA, or any protocol changing its terms or conditions, which has the effect of altering the existing provisions of law.
Third Country should be a member of OECD at the time of entering into DTAA with India, for the earlier treaty beneficiary (First Country) to claim parity.
MFN clause present in a tax treaty does not automatically lead to the benefit present in DTAA entered with a Third Country being extended automatically to the First Country. The terms of the earlier DTAA entered with the First Country are required to be amended through a separate notification under Section 90.
Treelife comments:
Going forward, entities from First Country should claim beneficial provisions present in DTAA entered between India and the Third Country under the MFN clause if: 1. Third Country is OECD member at the time of entering the DTAA with India 2. CBDT has issued a notification extended the benefits present in DTAA entered with a Third Country to the DTAA entered with the First Country.
As modern finance continues to be influenced by advancements in technology, two terms have emerged to delineate the evolving intersection of technology and financial services: “FinTech” and “TechFin”. While these terms may sound similar, they represent distinct paradigms that are reshaping the way financial services are delivered and consumed, particularly in markets like India: “FinTech”, characterized by innovative startups leveraging technology to disrupt traditional financial services, has gained momentum as a driver of financial inclusion and efficiency. On the other hand, “TechFin” refers to established technology companies integrating financial services into their existing platforms, leveraging vast user bases and data analytics to offer a wide array of financial products.
This article delves into the nuances of FinTech and TechFin, exploring their origins, key players, and implications for the Indian financial ecosystem. By understanding the difference between these two approaches, stakeholders can better navigate the evolving landscape of digital finance and harness its transformative potential for the benefit of India’s diverse population.
What is FinTech?
Fintech, short for financial technology, refers to the convergence of finance and technology, revolutionizing traditional financial services through innovative, technology driven solutions. Fintech thrives at the intersection of two broad domains: finance (including sectors such as banking, payments, non-banking financial companies, security broking, wealth management, insurance, digital lending and regulatory technology) and technology (including providers in sectors such as hardware, software, cloud, platform, blockchain, Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning, cybersecurity, and data analytics and big data) –
On the finance side, Fintech transforms sectors like banking, payments, digital lending, insurance and wealth management, enhancing efficiency, accessibility and user experience.
On the technology side, advancements like cloud services, blockchain, AI/ML and data analytics power financial innovations, creating smarter, faster and more secure financial services.
By integrating finance and technology, Fintech is revolutionizing how financial services are delivered, making them more efficient, secure and accessible.
Segments of Fintech
Fintechs generally operate in the following sectors: (i) Accounting & Finance; (ii) Business Lending & Finance; (iii) Asset Management; (iv) Core Banking & Infrastructure; (v) Capital Markets; (vi) Financial Services & Automation; (vii) Mobile Wallets & Remittances; (viii) Credit Score & Analytics; (ix) Payments Processing & Networks; (x) General Lending & Marketplaces; (xi) Real Estate & Mortgage; (xii) Payroll & Benefits; (xiii) Personal Finance; (xiv) Retail Investing & Secondary Markets; and (xv) Regulatory & Compliance.
India boasts participants in following segments of Fintech:
BankingTech – aids unbanked/underbanked services that aim to help underprivileged or low-income people who are neglected or underserved by conventional banks or financial services firms (eg: Jupiter Money, RazorpayX, Fi Money);
PayTech – suite of financial technologies that enable seamless, secure and real-time payment solutions (eg: PhonePe, Paytm, Razorpay, BharatPe);
LendingTech – technology-driven platforms and solutions that streamline and enhance the process of borrowing and lending money. Enables faster loan approvals, broader financial access and data-driven risk assessment that provides an efficient alternative to traditional lending methods (eg: Slice, ZestMoney, KredX);
InsureTech – innovative technology to enhance and streamline traditional insurance industry by way of digital platforms for policy comparison, purchase, claims processing, microinsurance and AI-driven risk assessments. Aims to increase accessibility, affordability and efficiency of insurance by leveraging data analytics, AI and digital platforms (eg: Acko, PolicyBazaar, Coverfox, Turtlemint);
WealthTech – technology is used to deliver investment management, financial planning and wealth advisory services. Democratizes access to sophisticated financial products and services, enabling wealth and investment management and future planning for users (eg: Zerodha, Groww, Scripbox, AngelOne);
RegTech – shorthand for regulatory technology, providing a set of tools to help businesses manage regulatory compliance and risk management (eg: Digio, IDfy, HyperVerge, Electronic Payments and Services).
Crypto & Blockchain – digital tokens (such as non-fungible tokens, or NFTs), digital cash, and cryptocurrency (such as Bitcoin, Ethereum, etc.) frequently make use of distributed ledger technology (DLT) called blockchain, which keeps records on a network of computers without the need for a central ledger. Smart contracts, which use code to automatically carry out agreements between parties like buyers and sellers, are another feature of blockchain technology.
Importance of Fintech
Fintech plays a pivotal role in shaping the modern financial landscape, with its significance stemming from several key factors:
Financial Inclusion: FinTech has democratized access to financial services, breaking down traditional barriers and reaching underserved populations. By leveraging innovative technologies like mobile banking and digital wallets, FinTech has made financial services more accessible to people around the world, empowering them with greater control over their finances.
Efficiency and Cost Savings: FinTech solutions streamline processes, automate tasks, and reduce overhead costs for financial institutions. Whether it’s through algorithmic trading, robo-advisors, or blockchain technology, FinTech enhances operational efficiency, driving down costs and improving the bottom line.
Enhanced Customer Experience: FinTech companies prioritize user experience, offering intuitive interfaces, personalized recommendations, and real-time access to financial information. By leveraging data analytics and artificial intelligence, FinTech enhances customer engagement, satisfaction, and loyalty, fostering long-term relationships in an increasingly competitive market.
Innovation and Disruption: FinTech thrives on innovation, constantly pushing the boundaries of traditional finance and challenging incumbents to adapt. From peer-to-peer lending and crowdfunding to cryptocurrencies and decentralized finance (DeFi), FinTech disrupts entrenched industries, catalyzing innovation and fostering a culture of experimentation.
Financial Literacy and Education: FinTech platforms provide educational resources, tools, and insights to help individuals make informed financial decisions. By offering financial literacy courses, budgeting apps, and investment tutorials, FinTech promotes financial literacy and empowers consumers to take control of their financial futures.
Financial Freedom: Peer-to-peer lending platforms connect borrowers with lenders directly, potentially offering lower interest rates and more accessible loans.
Investing Made Easy: Robo-advisors, powered by technology, can create personalized investment plans based on your risk tolerance, making investing more approachable.
Democratization of Finance: Fintech tools and services are often cheaper and easier to use than traditional options, allowing more people to participate in financial activities.
What is TechFin?
The term “Techfin” refers to technology companies operating in the financial sector to provide advanced or innovative technological solutions primarily designed to support the financial industry with cutting-edge offerings that, of course, meet the demands of the business. This explains how it relates to banking and financial commitments. To put it briefly, Techfin describes businesses that introduce financial solutions that are incorporated into internal management systems, utilizing financial resources and offering a consolidated view of data through a single interface.
Alibaba’s (dubbed the “Amazon of China”) founder, Jack Ma, is credited with coining the phrase. Financial goods were integrated into well-known apps by the investor and entrepreneur, who also included the BATs (Baidu, Alibaba, Tencent) to build the first techfin model and enhance activities related to financial products, services, and institutions. These are typically Business 2 Business (B2B) in nature, where they have tech products which can be used by financial institutions for their operations. Some examples of these in India include – Finacle (by Infosys), Mambu, BrokerEdge, InsureCRM and ODIN.
While FinTech firms start with finance and use technology to improve upon these services, TechFin companies start with technology and venture into the financial sector leveraging their tech strengths. One of the main issues that techfins resolves is the process of integrating and updating financial information, which is a major barrier to effective customer service for banks and cooperatives. Tech platforms are said to be able to cut the amount of time that specialists need to spend integrating a file in half with the innovative solutions offered by techfin companies. While initially focused on the distribution side of the financial services industry, techfin is content for banks to manage regulatory compliance obligations.
A sizable contribution of Techfin companies lies in data analytics. Banks, for example, are interested in acquiring access to clients’ financial transaction data, which diversifies their existing customer data and provides a true financial portrait of their customers. Similarly, each technology company has unique consumer information. Social media firms collect information on the social interests and activities of their users, whereas e-commerce companies collect information on client demand, transactions, and payment history. Google has data on nearly every area of customer life, whereas Apple and other telecommunications firms have data on user behavior, location, and activities. TechFin firms are interested in augmenting existing client data with transactional information in order to enhance their main product and provide supplementary financial services.
TechFin’s platform-centric, data-driven business models are independent of the financial services margin. Therefore, banks and financial services firms face bigger obstacles than Fintech. TechFin companies in India include technology giants like Google, Amazon, and Facebook, which have integrated financial services such as digital payments, lending, and insurance into their platforms.
Importance of TechFin
Expanded Access to Financial Services: TechFin platforms leverage their large user bases and advanced technology infrastructure to extend financial services to a wider audience. By integrating financial products seamlessly into their existing platforms, they can reach previously underserved populations, promoting financial inclusion and empowering individuals with access to banking, payments, and investment services.
Seamless Integration: Tech companies you already use, like social media or e-commerce platforms, can offer financial services like payments or budgeting tools within their existing apps.
Enhanced Security: Techfin companies often have robust security measures in place, potentially offering a safe and familiar environment for financial transactions.
Faster Adoption: By leveraging existing user bases of tech giants, techfin can accelerate the adoption of new financial services.
Focus on User Experience: Techfin companies prioritize user-friendly interfaces and intuitive designs, making financial tools more accessible and engaging.
How do FinTech and TechFin contribute to financial inclusion in India?
FinTech companies in India have played a significant role in expanding access to financial services, particularly among underserved populations, by offering digital banking, mobile payments, and micro-lending solutions. Similarly, TechFin companies have leveraged their vast user bases and technology infrastructure to extend financial services to a wider audience, promoting financial inclusion in the country.
How will Fintech and TechFin impact the future of the financial and economy?
All financial products and asset classes, whether utilized by retail clients, small and medium-sized companies (SMEs), or large institutions, will be digitized. The original wave of digitization included traditional products and services, including equities and government bonds, as well as consumer banking products like payments, loans, brokerage services, and vehicle insurance.
The second phase of digitizing consumer banking, SME and commercial banking, financial services, capital market, mortgage market, and fund management will be led by fintech. Mobile applications will facilitate the implementation of digitization projects across all corporate sectors. The future of finance and the economy is likely to be heavily influenced by the continued development and integration of Fintech and TechFin. Here’s a glimpse into some potential impacts:
Increased Financial Inclusion: Fintech and TechFin tools can reach a wider audience compared to traditional financial institutions. Mobile banking apps and peer-to-peer lending platforms can bring financial services to underserved communities, boosting financial inclusion and participation in the economy.
Democratization of Finance: With user-friendly interfaces and potentially lower fees, Fintech and TechFin can empower individuals to take more control of their finances. Robo-advisors can make investing more accessible, while mobile budgeting tools can promote better financial literacy.
Rise of the Cashless Society: As digital payment solutions become more convenient and secure, cash usage may decline. This could lead to a faster and more efficient flow of money within the economy.
Evolving Financial Products and Services: Innovation in Fintech and TechFin will likely lead to the creation of new financial products and services tailored to specific needs. This could include personalized insurance plans, AI-powered financial planning tools, and alternative investment options.
Enhanced Security and Fraud Prevention: TechFin companies often prioritize robust security measures, potentially leading to a decline in financial fraud. Additionally, advancements in data analytics can help identify and prevent suspicious activity.
Conclusion
In a nutshell:
Fintech disrupts with new ideas, while TechFin leverages existing tech for financial services.
Fintech may be smaller but innovative, while TechFin has a wider reach but integrates finance into existing services.
Both Fintech and TechFin are transforming the financial landscape, making it more convenient, accessible, and potentially more secure.
Fintech and TechFin are both disruptive forces within the financial services business. If traditional institutions wish to survive the digital revolution, they must immediately digitize their corporate structures. Fintech tackles a particular financial service issue for clients by providing an innovative financial solution or process based on technological capabilities in the form of a new product or service. TechFins integrates different existing financial and technological solutions into its business model.
The increased value of data makes it attractive for large tech companies to profit from their collected data, and it has been easy for them to be successful with the implementation of their products thus far due to their large customer base and the advantage they have with customers granting permission to use their data by agreeing to their terms and conditions (which are periodically updated in the benefit of the company). Moreover, when they become TechFins, they often experience no early fundraising concerns. Initial funding is typically difficult to get for fintech businesses, which rely heavily on angel investors and banking institutions. Crowdfunding has proved advantageous for FinTech funding, although it still faces challenges and is not yet internationally accessible. The incorporation, regulation and governance of fintech and techfin solutions (including for funding) remains an evolving challenge for authorities.
Frequently Asked Questions on Fintech vs Techfin
What is the main difference between FinTech and TechFin?
FinTech refers to companies that originate in finance and leverage technology to disrupt and improve financial services. In contrast, TechFin describes tech-first companies that integrate financial services into their existing platforms, often using their large user bases and data capabilities to deliver financial solutions.
How do FinTech and TechFin contribute to financial inclusion in India?
FinTech companies have expanded access to financial services for underserved populations by providing mobile banking, digital wallets, and lending platforms. Similarly, TechFin companies leverage their vast user networks to integrate financial services, extending access to a broader audience and fostering financial inclusion.
What types of financial services do FinTech and TechFin companies offer in India?
FinTech companies like PhonePe and KredX focus on sectors like digital payments, lending, insurance, wealth management, and regulatory compliance. TechFin firms, such as Google and Amazon, incorporate financial services like digital payments, lending, and insurance into their existing platforms, offering a more integrated user experience.
What role does data play in the operation of TechFin companies?
TechFin companies rely heavily on data analytics to offer personalized financial solutions. By using customer data from their tech platforms, TechFin firms can create a financial portrait of users, improving service personalization and security while gaining insights into user financial behavior.
How do FinTech and TechFin impact the future of finance and the economy in India?
FinTech and TechFin are expected to enhance financial inclusion, promote a cashless society, democratize finance, and lead to the development of secure and innovative financial products. Their continued growth could reshape economic participation and the delivery of financial services in India.
Every restaurant has to comply with some taxation regulations and also file its returns on a regular interval as required under the specific laws in India. Among others, the Income Tax Act, 1961 (“Act”) and the Goods and Service Tax, 2017 (“GST Act”) are the main governing regulations for taxation of restaurant business income. In this article we provide a detailed insight on Tax and Returns for a Restaurant in India.
Taxation in India is divided into two parts – A. Direct Tax and B. Indirect Tax.
Direct Tax is the tax that is levied and paid directly by the restaurant while, Indirect taxes are those taxes that are levied on goods or services. They differ from direct taxes because they are not levied on a person who pays them directly to the government, they are instead levied on products and are collected by an intermediary, the person selling the product. These taxes are levied by adding them to the price of the service or product which tends to push the cost of the product up.
A. Understanding Direct Tax
Income Tax
Income from restaurants is governed by ‘Profits and Gains of Business or Profession Chapter’ as provided under the Act. Section 2(13) of the Act has defined the term ‘Business’ as including any trade, commerce or manufacture or any adventure or concern in the nature of trade, commerce or manufacture. Section 2(36) states that ‘Profession’ includes vocation’ without defining what the profession means. Generally, the profession involves labour skills, education and special domain knowledge.
All the businesses, including the food industry, must have a PAN and TAN in the name of the business or in the name of the owner (in case of a Sole-Proprietorship) in whose name the transactions are to be carried out. PAN and TAN are two ten-digit different alphanumeric numbers provided by the IT Department. Every person who deducts or collects tax at the source has to get a TAN.
In case the business is set up in the form of a company or a LLP, there are different rates of tax applicable. In case of an individual the income from PGBP (defined hereinafter) shall form a part of the income of the assessee.
Principles of Computation of business income
1.
Business must be carried by the assessee himself or through his agent.
2.
Business must be carried on during the previous year.
3.
Business profits of the previous year must be taxable.
4.
Business profits should be understood in its true commercial sense.
5.
Business profits should be real and not fictional.
Most Relevant Income Tax Provisions
Section 28 of the Act states that – The following income shall be chargeable to income-tax under the head “Profits and gains of business or profession” (“PGBP”) — 1) the profits and gains of any business or profession which was carried on by the assessee at any time during the previous year. Along with specific provisions as detailed in Section 28(ii) to 28(vii) of the Act.
Section 41 “Profits chargeable to tax” of the Act deals with a situation where: 1) A loss, expenditure or trading liability has been incurred in the course of business or profession; 2) Allowance or deduction has been made in respect of such loss, expenditure or trading liability in the course of assessment; and 3) A benefit is subsequently obtained in respect of such loss, expenditure or trading liability by way of remission or cessation thereof. In such a situation, the value of the benefit accruing to the assessee is deemed to be profits and gains of business or profession.
Section 176(3A) states that – Where any business is discontinued in any year, any sum received after the discontinuance shall be deemed to be the income of the recipient and charged to tax accordingly in the year of receipt, if such sum would have been included in the total income of the person who carried on the business had such sum been received before such discontinuance
Any other incomes received during the course of business such as income from house property or rental income, bank interest, etc.
Presumptive taxation – Section 44AD of the Act states that in the case of an eligible assessee engaged in an eligible business, a sum equal to eight per cent of the total turnover or gross receipts of the assessee in the previous year on account of such business or, as the case may be, a sum higher than the aforesaid sum claimed to have been earned by the eligible assessee, shall be deemed to be the profits and gains of such business chargeable to tax under the head PGBP. However, eight percent shall be replaced with ―six per cent in respect of the amount of total turnover or gross receipts which is received by an account payee cheque or an account payee bank draft or use of electronic clearing system through a bank account during the previous year. Here eligible business shall mean – (i) any business except the business of plying, hiring or leasing goods carriages referred to in section 44AE; and (ii) whose total turnover or gross receipts in the previous year does not exceed an amount of 2 [two] crore rupees.
Deductions under Section 30 to 37 of the Act – Deductions available from the income under the sections pertaining to rent, repairs, depreciation, additional depreciation (if applicable), deduction under section 32AC is available if actual cost of new plant and machinery acquired and installed by a manufacturing company during the previous year exceeds Rs. 25/100 Crores, as the case may be (in case the business is engaged in manufacturing), Non-corporate taxpayers can amortise certain preliminary expenses (up to maximum of 5% of cost of the project) (Subject to certain conditions and nature of expenditures), insurance premium paid, bonus or commission paid to employees, interest on borrowed capital, employer’s contribution to provident fund and gratuity fund, bad debts written off, securities transaction and commodities transaction tax paid etc. and other such deduction as may be applicable.
Disallowances – There are some disallowances that have been specifically mentioned in the Act which shall not be eligible to be deducted from the income for the purposes of calculation of PGBP, some of them are wealth-tax or any other tax of similar nature shall not be deductible, Any sum payable to a resident, which is subject to deduction of tax at source, would attract 30% disallowance if it was paid without deduction of tax at source or if tax was deducted but not deposited with the Central Government till the due date of filing of return, Any sum (other than salary) payable outside India or to a non-resident, which is chargeable to tax in India in the hands of the recipient, shall not be allowed to be deducted if it was paid without deduction of tax at source or if tax was deducted but not deposited with the Central Government till the due date of filing of return etc.
Computation of PGBP (Profit and Gains from Business & Profession)
Business Profit should be calculated through Profit & Loss Account. On the Credit side of Profit & Loss Account there are some Incomes which are tax free or not taxable under the head Business/Profession.
Balance as per P & L A/c
(+) Profit
(-) Loss Amount
Add Expenses claimed but not allowed under the Act
All Provisions & Reserves (Provision for Bad Debt/Depreciation/Income)
All Taxes (Except Income Tax, Wealth Tax etc.) except sales Tax,Excise
Duty & Local Taxes of premises used for business.
All Charities & Donations
All personal expenses
Any type of fine / penalty
Speculative Losses
All capital losses
Any Difference in Profit & Loss Account
Previous year expenses
Rent paid to self
All expenses related to other head of Income
Payments made to the partner (in terms of salary, commission or any other way.)
All capital expenses except scientific research
Loss by theft
Expenses on illegal business
Rent for residential portion
Interest on Income tax, TDS etc
Total of these Items is added to the profit or adjusted from loss
Business Tax Returns
A business tax return is an income tax return. The return is a statement of income and expenditure of the business. Any tax to be paid on the profits made by you is declared in this return. The return also contains details of the assets and liabilities held by the business. Items like fixed assets, debtors and creditors of business, loans taken and loans were given are declared here.
In the case of a sole proprietor, business income and other personal income like salary, income from house property and interest income have to be stated on the same return. If your total income before deductions is above the basic taxable limit it is mandatory to file the income tax return irrespective of profit or loss in the business. The basic taxable limit is Rs. 2.5 lakh.
For companies, firms and Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) a business tax return has to be filed irrespective of profit or loss. Even if there are no operations undertaken, a return has to be filed. Companies, firms, and LLPs are taxed at a rate of 30%.
Every taxpayer whose turnover is above Rs. 1 Crore in case of businesses and Rs. 50 Lakh in case of professionals is required to get a tax audit done. The taxpayer has to appoint a Chartered Accountant to audit their accounts. A tax audit is necessary even when the profits declared by you is less than 8% (6% on Digital transactions) of the turnover in case of presumptive taxation.
Additionally, surcharge is applicable in the following cases –
Particulars
Tax Rate
If total income exceeds Rs. 1 crore but not Rs. 10 Crore
7% of tax calculated on domestic company
If total income exceeds Rs. 10 crore
12% of tax calculated on domestic company
Health & education Cess: Further 4% of income tax calculated and applicable surcharge will be added to the amount of total tax liability before this cess.
Alternate Minimum Tax (“AMT”)
AMT provisions are applicable to following taxpayers:
All non-corporate taxpayers; and
Taxpayers who have claimed deduction under:
Chapter VI-A under the heading “C. — Deductions in respect of certain incomes’ – These deductions are under Section 80H to 80RRB provided in respect of profits and gains of specific industries such as hotel business, small scale industrial undertaking, housing projects, export business, infrastructure development etc. However, deduction under Section 80P which provides deduction to co-operative societies is excluded for this purpose; or
Deduction under Section 35AD – While capital expenditure in assets usually qualify for depreciation year on year, under this Section 100% deduction is allowed on capital expenditure incurred for specified business such as operation of cold chain facility, fertiliser production etc; or
Profit linked deduction under Section 10AA – Deduction of profit varying from 100% to 50% is provided to units in Special Economic Zones (SEZs).
Based on the above, it can be concluded that AMT provisions are applicable only to those non-corporate taxpayers having income under the head ‘Profits or Gains of Business or Profession’. Further, as mentioned above AMT provisions are applicable only when normal tax payable is lower than AMT in any financial year.
Minimum Alternate Tax (“MAT”)
Alternatively, all the companies (including foreign companies) are required to pay minimum alternate tax at the rate of 15% on book profits if the tax calculated as per above rates are less than 15% of book profits.
Returns under the Act
ITR -3 is to be filed by individuals and HUFs having income from PGBP
ITR -4 SUGAM for Individuals, HUFs and Firms (other than LLP) being a resident having total income upto Rs.50 lakh and having income from business and profession which is computed under sections 44AD, 44ADA or 44AE
ITR -6 is to be filed by companies other than companies claiming exemption under section 11 of the Act.
All restaurants having business in the individual capacity shall file the ITR -3 while those in the capacity of the company shall be required to file ITR -6.
B. Understanding Indirect Tax
Tax concepts under Indirect Tax include GST.
GST (Goods and Services Tax)
It was introduced in July 2017. What this tax regime does is it unifies all the taxes that the restaurant and customers had to pay earlier. The Minimum turnover is required to be Rs 20 Lakhs for registration in GST.
Therefore, this variety of taxes is now just consolidated into State Goods and Services Tax (SGST) and Central Goods and Services Tax (CGST). Moreover, GST registration is a state-centric matter; therefore, if the restaurants have different outlets, each outlet must be registered separately under that particular state. Furthermore, there are different tax slabs as well for different restaurants. The restaurant GST rates are laid down below:
Category 1: For the restaurants without an AC or liquor license
Category 2: For the restaurants with AC
Category 3: For 5-star hotels or luxury hotels that serve liquor and food.
GST tax has replaced the Value Added Tax (“VAT”) and service tax regime on food services. However, the point to note here is the service charge by restaurants is separate from GST.
Alcoholic beverages have applicable VAT, which is a state-level tax, therefore restaurants serving both food and alcoholic beverages will levy separate taxes with GST applying to food and non-alcoholic beverages; however, VAT will be charged on alcoholic beverages served only.
Types of GST
There are three types of GST namely CGST, SGST, and Integrated Goods and Services Tax (IGST). CGST is the tax charged by the central government on the intrastate supply of goods and services. In the same way, SGST is the tax applied to the same intrastate supply of goods and services by the state government and IGST is Integrated Goods and Services Tax, which is levied for the interstate transfer of goods and services. The GST rate on food items and GST rate on restaurants is governed on the whole by the central government.
Composition Scheme in GST
The composition scheme under GST means that a taxable person under a certain turnover limit has to pay tax at a lower rate concerning certain conditions. This scheme is developed for the timely recovery of taxes, filing of returns, and to provide a simplified way of record maintenance for small businesses.
Since the objective of the GST composition scheme for restaurants or any other business is basically to bring all businesses under one roof, this composition scheme will be provided to a taxable person only if he/she registers all the other registered taxable persons who are using the same. Food Tax in India can be 5%, 12%, or 18% based on factors such as the establishment type and location of restaurants or food service providers among others. Goods and services tax has replaced the VAT and Service tax regime on food services. 18% GST rate applies to accommodation in hotels including 5 stars and above rated hotels, inns, guest houses, clubs, campsites or other commercial places meant for residential or lodging purposes, where room rent ranges from Rs.5000 and above per night per room.
The rate at which restaurants are required to pay GST is fixed at a concessional rate of 5% which is to be levied on the turnover subject to the following restrictions:
The Turnover of the restaurant should not exceed Rs 1.5 Crores (Rupees 150 lakhs). However, this limit is Rupees 1 Crore for special category States.
The restaurant should not be engaged in any services other than the restaurant subject to certain exemptions.
The restaurant can’t be engaged in the interstate supply of goods
The restaurant can’t supply any items exempt under GST.
The restaurant can’t supply goods through an e-commerce operator
The restaurant can’t avail any Input Tax Credit (“ITC”)
The restaurant can’t collect taxes from the customer
Rates of GST
Types of restaurants
GST Rate (Normal Scheme)
GST Rate (Composition Scheme)
Standalone restaurants
5% without ITC
5% without ITC provided turnover for the whole financial year does not exceeds 1.5 crores
Standalone outdoor catering services
5% without ITC
Restaurants within hotels (where room tariff is less than Rs. 7,500/-)
5% without ITC
Normal / composite outdoor catering within hotels (where the room tariff is less than Rs. 7,500/-)
5% without ITC
Restaurants within hotels (where the room tariff is less than Rs. 7,500/-)*
18% without ITC
Restaurants within hotels (where the room tariff is more than or equal to Rs. 7,500/-)
18% without ITC
Normal / composite outdoor catering within hotels (where the room tariff is more than or equal to Rs. 7,500/-)
18% without ITC
Supply of food / drinks in restaurant having facility of air-conditioning or central heating at any time during the year
18% without ITC
Restaurants serving alcohol
18% without ITC
*This covers individuals supplying catering or other services in hotels (having room tariff of Rs 7,500 or more) and not any hotel accommodation services.
Returns under GST
All businesses need to file the GST return. GSTR 1 is to be filed on a monthly basis.
GSTR 3B needs to be filed by all restaurants and hotels. The GSTR 3B needs to be filed by the 20th of every month.
Return filing under GST composition Scheme for Restaurants
A person engaged in Restaurant business can pay tax under GST normal provisions without opting GST composition scheme and have to file monthly GST returns. On the contrary, restaurants opting the composition scheme will have to file GST returns quarterly in Form GSTR-4 on the common GSTN portal by the 18th of the month following the quarter. For example, a GST return in respect of supplies made by the restaurant from October to December is required to file the return by 18th January.
Conclusion
Complying with Tax regulations for your Restaurant in India
In conclusion, navigating the tax landscape for restaurants in India requires a comprehensive understanding of various aspects, including income tax on restaurant business, GST rates, and tax deductions for restaurant owners. Restaurant owners must be aware of taxes such as income tax, payroll taxes, and GST on restaurant food. Understanding how tax is calculated in a restaurant is crucial for financial planning and compliance. Additionally, restaurants must stay informed about changes in tax laws and rates to ensure accurate tax filings and avoid penalties. While taxes can pose challenges, they are essential for funding government services and infrastructure. By managing taxes effectively, restaurant owners can optimize their financial performance and contribute positively to the economy. Moreover, leveraging tax refunds and deductions can provide additional financial benefits for restaurant businesses. In summary, staying informed about tax concepts and regulations is vital for the success and sustainability of restaurants in India.As per the National Restaurant Association of India (NRAI) report, the restaurant market has reached Rs.5.99 lakh crore, growing at a compounded annual growth rate of 9%.Running a successful restaurant in India requires not only culinary expertise but also a firm grasp of the various tax regulations governing your business.The restaurant monthly income have gradually trimmed down due to the market acquired by popular third-party platforms such as Swiggy, Zomato and UberEats that have embedded the concept of discounts and freebies in the mind of all customers. This blog has provided a comprehensive overview of the key direct and indirect taxes applicable to restaurants, including income tax under the Income Tax Act, 1961, and Goods and Services Tax (GST) under the GST Act, 2017.The payroll department can be a big challenge for restaurant owners.
Income Tax : File income tax returns under the appropriate form (ITR-3, ITR-4 SUGAM, or ITR-6) based on your business structure and income.
GST : Register for GST if your turnover exceeds Rs. 20 lakhs and comply with applicable rates and return filing requirements. Consider the composition scheme for simplified compliance if eligible.
Stay informed : Tax laws and regulations can change. Regularly consult with a tax advisor or accountant to ensure your restaurant remains compliant.
By understanding and adhering to these tax regulations for 2025, you can ensure your restaurant operates smoothly and avoids potential penalties. A restaurant owner needs to diligently keep track of all expenses to ensure accurate income tax filings. Moreover, restaurants must stay abreast of changes in tax laws and rates to optimize their financial performance and capitalize on tax refunds where applicable.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ’s) about Tax and Returns for Restaurant
1. What are the main taxes applicable to restaurants in India? Restaurants in India comply with both Income Tax under the Income Tax Act, 1961 and Goods and Services Tax (GST) under the GST Act, 2017.
2. Which ITR form should I file for my restaurant? The applicable ITR form depends on your business structure:
ITR-3: Individuals and HUFs with profits under PGBP.
ITR-4 SUGAM: Individuals, HUFs, and firms with income up to Rs. 50 lakh and taxed under sections 44AD, 44ADA, or 44AE.
ITR-6: Companies (except those exempt under Section 11).
3. When do I need to register for GST for my restaurant? Registration is mandatory if your annual turnover exceeds Rs. 20 lakh.
4. What are the different GST rates for restaurants? Rates vary depending on factors like air-conditioning, liquor service, and hotel presence. Check the blog for details.
5. Does my restaurant qualify for the GST composition scheme? This scheme offers a 5% flat tax rate for eligible restaurants with a turnover less than Rs. 1.5 crore (Rs. 1 crore in special states). See the blog for eligibility criteria.
6. How often do I need to file GST returns for my restaurant? Restaurants generally file GSTR-3B monthly and GSTR-4 quarterly under the composition scheme.
7. What are the key points for ensuring tax compliance for my restaurant?
Maintain proper records and invoices.
File returns accurately and on time.
Pay taxes due promptly.
Seek professional guidance if needed.
8. Where can I find more information on restaurant taxation in India? Consult a tax advisor like Treelife, refer to the official websites of the Income Tax Department and GST Council, or revisit this blog for a deeper dive!
Why due diligence is conducted for startups in India?
Investment in a startup business could be risky and thus, venture capitalists and angel investors appoint startup consultants having the relevant expertise in the area to conduct startup due diligence before making such an investment. A potential investor in startup companies should gain a holistic understanding of the startup business they are investing in and performing a startup due diligence furthers the cause.
Startup Due Diligence is most often performed by potential startup investors before making the decision of capital entry into a startup business. During this process, the financial, commercial, legal, tax and compliance conditions of the startup are thoroughly analyzed based on historical data in order to objectively assess the operational situation of the company in the near future. This allows the startup investors to estimate the potential risks, SWOT directly or indirectly affecting the value of the target company. Due diligence immediately precedes the negotiation stage, after which the startup due diligence report prepared by the startup consultants is reviewed by the investors and the shareholder’s subscription agreement (SSA) is signed if everything goes smoothly.
Most common due diligence mistakes in 2025
Here are a few common mistakes we have observed after working on startup due diligence for multiple startup business:
A. Legal Due Diligence Mistakes:
Legal due diligence is an essential aspect of the entire due diligence process, especially in the context of procurement. It looks for and assesses any legal risks related to the target company or sector that is being purchased. Contract compliance, litigation risk, intellectual property rights, and many more subjects are covered by legal due diligence. Legal due diligence focuses on a number of things, one of which is government rule and regulatory compliance. This kind of due diligence comprises reviewing all essential documents to ensure that the target firm has complied with all applicable national and international regulations in its operations. The purchasing company may be subject to significant liabilities if they don’t comply. The following factors are involved in Legal due diligence –
Inconsistent terms in agreements – Plainly, if a contract term means one thing when it is considered on its own and means something very different when it is considered in the light of a printed term in a set of standard conditions, that is likely to shed considerable light on that issue. When two clauses conflict and one of them is a conventional term of one party and the other is the result of bespoke drafting, the bespoke drafting will usually take precedence. If a contract calls for something to be produced in line with a prescribed design and to satisfy specified standards, the parties must share the risk if the prescribed design falls short of the prescribed standards.
Agreements Inadequacy – Employee stock options are a common topic on investor due diligence questionnaires that founders get. Investors should be wary if you claim to have given your key staff options and have represented this in the cap table, but there are no stock option agreements or plans in place. It is quite probable that investors will request that the founders address this issue as quickly as possible. The solution to avoid the above scenario is to maintain current option valuation. External parties perform this appraisal for any noteworthy occasions, such as the opening of new investment rounds. Initially, your staff members might be curious about the true worth of their options-based shares at any given moment. Secondly, upon employing staff in the nation where your business is registered , they will be required to notify local tax authorities of any appreciation in the value of their shares. The importance of having an updated firm value increases with your organization’s worldwide reach and workforce diversity.
Stamp duty not paid on agreements – Like income tax and sales tax that the government collects, stamp duty is a tax that needs to be paid in full and on schedule. Penalties are incurred for payment delays. An instrument or document that has paid stamp duty is regarded as legitimate and lawful, and as such, it has evidential value and may be used as proof in court. The court will not accept instruments or papers that are not properly stamped as evidence. A penalty of 2% per month will be applied to the outstanding stamp duty balance if it is not paid on time.
Equity promises without documentation – Written documentation in the form of a signed binding pledge card or other written correspondence would typically provide sufficient evidence of a promise. Three primary forms of equity are granted to employees by startups: The right to purchase or sell a specific number of founders’ shares at a fixed price is known as a stock option. Between the vesting date—which occurs after an employee has earned stock options—and the expiration date, the employee may exercise this right. This is the most typical kind of equity that entrepreneurs decide to provide their staff members.The right to purchase or sell a specific number of business shares at a fixed price is known as a stock warrant. Although warrants often have longer expiry dates than stock options, they can also only be exercised between the vesting and expiration periods.The ownership of a certain number of shares is known as a stock grant. No vesting is present. The main problem that occurs in startups are that they promise equity without doing proper documentation.
Inadequate IPR protection – During the frantic process of developing new products, it is not uncommon for entrepreneurs to forget to sign the appropriate contracts with all of the consultants and contractors they have recruited. Investors will always ask about the agreements for the transfer of intellectual property of all the product’s components—codebase, designs, texts, etc. during the due diligence process. It’s suspicious if these agreements weren’t in place. Investor ownership would be at danger in the event that any former workers or contractors choose to sue the business.
B. Financial Due Diligence Mistakes:
Financial due diligence is one of the most important things in the current society. Before completing any deal, firms should be informed about the risks, stability, and financial information. Financial due diligence is carried out extensively to guarantee the correctness of all the financial details included in the confidential information memorandum (CIM). For example, financial statements, company predictions, and projections may be considered in a financial audit.
Irregularities in filing returns – Due diligence on taxes refers to a comprehensive examination of all possible taxes that might be imposed on a particular firm and all taxing authorities that could have a strong enough connection to hold it accountable for paying those taxes. Buyers in a deal typically use tax due diligence to identify any significant tax obligations that could be a concern. Tax due diligence is more concerned with greater financial statistics than the preparation of yearly income tax returns, which may concentrate on little inconsistencies or errors (e.g., whether a rejected meal and entertainment deduction should have been Rs10,000 instead of Rs5,000). These numbers have the ability to influence a buyer’s negotiating position or choice to proceed with a deal. If the contract only relates to a portion of the shares, the threshold for what is deemed substantial may change based on the entire value of the transaction or the goal.
Book of accounts not updated on a regular basis – Every registered person is required by the Goods and Services Tax Law to keep accurate and truthful books of accounts and records. If the same is not maintained, the defaulter may face penalties and maybe have their items seized. If, as per section 35(1), books of accounts are not kept up to date, the appropriate official would ascertain the tax owed on unaccounted goods and services in accordance with section 73 or section 74 requirements. Furthermore, failure to preserve or maintain the books of accounts may result in a penalty higher than INR 10,000 or the relevant amount of tax, per penalty section 122(1)(xvi). The Central items and Services Tax Act, 2017’s Section 130 permits the seizure of items and the imposition of fines. Therefore, in accordance with section 130(1)(ii), if the defaulter fails to account for any items for which they are required to pay tax, they will be subject to the seizure of their goods and a penalty under section 122.The investor wouldn’t want to invest in any startup where the books of accounts aren’t maintained which would attract unnecessary penalties and fines.
Adhoc accounting treatments – Ad hoc journal entries are those impromptu changes to the books of accounts that are made in order to preserve financial correctness. These entries are essential for maintaining accuracy and providing a genuine and impartial picture of the organisation, whether they are made to account for unique or unusual transactions, repair errors, or make necessary modifications outside of the regular accounting cycle. A realistic and fair image of the financials requires, in accordance with basic accounting rules, the creation of provisions for incurred costs under the mercantile system of accounting. As a result, all companies that use the mercantile accounting system must make year-end provisions for the costs incurred related to services rendered through March 31 of the next fiscal year. When the actual invoice is received in a later month or months, the allowance for expenditures is almost always reversed. ITAT Delhi ruled that it is irrational and subject to be removed to prohibit ad hoc spending as a proportion of gross profit in the absence of particular findings.
Statutory payments not made – Statutory payments are those that, according to applicable law, must be given to government authorities. Almost all countries have statutory deductions from pay. The law mandates these deductions. Different nations have different kinds of statutory deductions, but common ones are income tax, social security tax, government payments to health insurance plans, unemployment insurance, pensions, and provident funds, as well as required union dues. Statutory deductions lower employees’ take-home income, which lowers their ability to maintain a reasonable standard of living. As a result, living wage calculations must account for statutory deductions. As an employer, there are several statutory payments that you may need to pay your employees. Normally, employers may recoup 92% of this, but small businesses may be able to recover 103% of it.
No compliance for foreign payments – Simply put, foreign payments, also known as cross-border payments, is sending or receiving payments from one country to another. This might be done as a bank or supplier payment, and it often entails a foreign exchange, or FX, of two distinct currencies. Every Indian Resident company that has made a Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in the preceding year, including the current year, must submit the Foreign Liabilities and Assets (FLA) Return. All borrowers must report all External Commercial Borrowing transactions to the RBI through an AD Category – I Bank every month in the Form ‘ECB 2 Return’. When an Indian business obtains foreign investment and allots shares in response, it must register the allocation with the RBI. Within 30 days following allotment, the corporation must provide the details of the allotment to the RBI in Form FC-GPR (Foreign Currency – Gross Provisional Return).Form ODI must be submitted by an Indian resident who invests overseas. Within 30 days of receiving them, share certificates or any other documentation proving involvement in a foreign joint venture or wholly owned subsidiary must be turned in to the authorized AD. The maximum fine for non-compliance of foreign payments is two lakh rupees, or three times the amount that was violated. For every day after the first that the violation persists, the fine may be as much as Rs 5,000. Therefore, all businesses and Indian citizens who conduct business abroad must make sure that the FEMA regulations are followed.
TDS non compliances – TDS means Tax Deducted at Source. The goal of the TDS idea was to collect taxes right at the source of income. According to this idea, a person (deductor) who owes another person (deductee) a payment of a certain kind is required to deduct tax at the source and send it to the Central Government. Based on Form 26AS or a TDS certificate that the deductor issues, the deductee whose income tax has been withheld at source is entitled to a credit of the amount withheld. The assessee should pay ₹ 200 per day as a penalty under U/S 234E if he does not file the TDS return within the allotted period. However, the penalty may not be greater than the TDS amount that must be paid. Furthermore, if the assessee provides false information or neglects to file the return within the allotted time frame, he may be penalised between ₹ 10,000 and ₹ 1 lakh under U/S 271H. This penalty will also be applied to the penalty specified in U.S. 234E.
Under certain circumstances, the following can be done to avoid the penalty U/S 271H:
Send the central government the tax that was withheld at the source.
If the government is owed money, pay the late penalties and interest.
Submit the TDS return no later than
C. Compliance Due Diligence:
The process of carrying out a comprehensive examination, audit, or study of a business’s compliance with governmental and non-governmental regulatory organizations is known as compliance due diligence. It basically aims to determine if a business is abiding by the regulations. The possibility that some businesses have discovered ways to get around certain laws is one of the problems that compliance due diligence looks for.
Failure to maintain minutes and update statutory registers – In accordance with the terms of the Companies Act of 2013, statutory registers are registers that are kept at the company’s registered office and contain particular details of the directors, shareholders, deposits, loans, and guarantees, among other things. The Companies Act of 2013 and the associated regulations outlined in the Companies (Management and Administration) Rules of 2014, together with other applicable requirements, necessitate the maintenance of statutory registers. A corporation must keep the stated statutory registers that are appropriate to them based on their business and activities, even if there are additional registers that must also be kept up to date in accordance with the terms of the Companies Act 2013.Since the corporations Act of 2013 requires the upkeep of the statutory register, any violation of these provisions and regulations carries serious consequences for both the corporations and the defaulting executives of the firm. Keep the necessary statutory registers up to date for the sake of good company governance and to prevent such fines. Penalties under sub-section (5) of section 88 of the Companies Act 2013 stipulate that a company will be fined three lakh rupees and that each officer of the company in default will be fined fifty thousand rupees if it fails to maintain a register of its members, debenture holders, or other security holders, or if it fails to maintain them in accordance with the provisions of sub-section (1) or sub-section (2).
Missing share certificates – A share certificate is a written document that is legally proof of ownership of the number of shares stated on it, and it is issued and formally signed by authorised signatories on behalf of a firm. A share certificate is issued to a shareholder as proof of purchase and as proof of ownership of a certain number of the company’s shares. Subsection 4 of Section 56 of the Companies Act 2013 states that all companies are required to submit the certificates of any securities that are assigned, transferred, or communicated, unless prohibited by any legislation or by an order from a court, tribunal, or other authority.-(a) For those who subscribe to the company’s memorandum and articles of association, within two months of the date of formation; (b) For any shares that are allotted, within two months of the date of allocation;(c) Within a month of the date on which the firm received the transfer instrument under sub-section (1), or, in the event that a transfer or transmission of securities, the notification of transmission under sub-section (2); (d) In the event that any Debentures are allocated, during a six-month period from the date of allocation. The above section’s proviso stipulates that: (i) in cases where securities are handled by a depository, the company must notify the depository of the specifics of the securities’ allocation as soon as they are made; and (ii) additionally, that certificates of all securities shall be delivered to subscribers by a Specified IFSC public company within sixty days of its incorporation, allotment, transfer, or transmission, and by a Specified IFSC private company within the same sixty-day period. Section 56 of the Companies Act of 2013 contains the punitive penalty pertaining to non-compliance or default, specifically in sub-section (6). Subsection (6) of section 56 of the Companies Act states that in the event that any of the provisions of sub-sections (1) to (5) are not followed, a penalty of fifty thousand rupees will be imposed on the business and each officer involved.
Lack of govt registrations – When business owners get due diligence questionnaires from investors, data protection will undoubtedly be on the list of topics covered. They want to make sure you have all the procedures and guidelines needed to safeguard the information of your clients and abide by international data protection laws like the CCPA and GDPR. This is particularly true if your firm plans to sell its products in the European Union. You’ll be operating in the EU by default if you’re aiming for a worldwide market.: By implementing appropriate rules and procedures, you may reduce the likelihood of data breaches and improve your ability to collaborate with B2B clients. Investors will also place a high value on your company’s and your business model’s compliance with all applicable laws in the operational jurisdictions. Your startup’s business license and good standing might be suspended if it does not have the necessary permissions. If you work in banking, healthcare, or other delicate industries, this is very likely to happen. Regarding the KYC and AML policies and procedures, they will assist you in adhering to sanctions legislation, anti-corruption laws, and anti-bribery laws. If these protocols are followed, prospective investors and major partners will instantly verify that your firm isn’t included in any harmful databases.
Conclusion
Indian startups must navigate a complex legal and financial landscape, and failing to conduct thorough due diligence can have severe consequences. Here are critical areas to avoid common pitfalls.
Legal:
Contract Confusion: Ensure all agreements have consistent terms, are comprehensive, and bear proper stamp duty. Verbal equity promises can lead to disputes; formalize them! Avoid simply copying old agreements – tailor them to each scenario.
IP Inattention: Inadequately protecting intellectual property leaves your core assets vulnerable. Secure proper registrations and maintain confidentiality agreements.
Financial:
Accounting Ambiguity: Maintain updated and accurate books of accounts, avoiding ad hoc treatments. Regularly file tax returns and comply with statutory payments. Address foreign exchange regulations and TDS (Tax Deducted at Source) requirements diligently.
Compliance:
Paperwork Paralysis: Don’t neglect record-keeping! Maintain meeting minutes, statutory registers, and share certificates. File all necessary statutory forms and obtain government registrations to operate smoothly.
By addressing these due diligence gaps, Indian startups can mitigate risks, ensure compliance, and pave the way for sustainable growth. Remember, due diligence is an investment, not a cost.
Exit provisions determine how, when and at what price investors can sell their stake in a company and procure an exit from the Company, thereby, being the most crucial exit rights that an investor seeks in an investment transaction.
Important aspects of an Exit provision –
Exit period: This determines the maximum period within which the Company and the Founders are required to provide returns to the Investors on their investment. Typically Investors agree upon an exit period of about 5-7 years.
Exit Price: Investors usually do not incorporate an exit price in the documentation at an early stage as it is difficult to determine the growth trajectory of a company so early on, hence, exit is to be procured at the fair market value at the time of such exit
Exit Mechanisms: The investment documentation sets out the manner in which an exit can be provided such as IPO, third party sale, etc.
Various Exit Mechanisms
IPO: An investor can procure an exit by ensuring their shares are sold in an initial public offer, in case the Company decides to be listed on a stock exchange.
Strategic Sale and Third Party Sale: In case the Company has an offer from a strategic buyer to buy substantial amount of shares/assets of the Company, the Investor can procure an exit by selling their shares in such a strategic out, whereas, a third party sale is a simple secondary transfer between the investor and a proposed buyer.
Buyback: In the event the Company/Founders are unable to provide an exit to the Investors within the exit period, the Investors may require the Company to repurchase the shares held by them.
Put Option: Considering the legal barriers in executing a buyback, investors seldom insist on having a Put Option on the Founders, i.e., at the option of the Investors, the Founders are required to purchase the shares held by the Investors.
Sale in a new fundraise: In case the Company raises a new round of funding, they could offer the investors exit by way of facilitating a secondary transfer of their shares to the new Investors.
Liquidation Preference: The Company may provide an exit to the investors at the time of a liquidity event ,i.e., an event including but not limited to merger, acquisition, corporate restructure, change of control of a company, liquidation, etc. by providing them at least 1x of their investment amount or such amount from the proceeds of a liquidation event, proportionate to their shareholding in the Company.
Tag Along Right: This is right enables the investors to tag alongside the Founders in case the Founders find a third party buyer for their shares.
Drag Along Right: In the event the Company is unable to provide an exit to the Investors, the investors have a right to invoke a right to drag all the shareholders of the Company in a drag sale (sale of substantially all shares of the Company) facilitated by such investors.
Founders’ Perspective on Exit
Let us look at certain exit provisions from a Founders’ perspective and what kind of safeguards do founders need to build in the exit rights:
Exit Right
Founder specific provisions
Exit Period
Founders can be about providing an exit period of not less than 5 years.
Exit Price
Founders of especially early stage companies should not agree on a delta on the investment amount, and instead provide the exit price equivalent to the fair market value at the time of such exit.
IPO
It is important to ensure that while Investors would be able to sell their shares in an IPO, the Founders should also have the right to do so in order to realise the value of their shares.
Put Option
A Put Option ensures a direct obligation on the Founders to purchase the shares held by the Investors from their own funds and hence, it is not recommended to sign up to such provisions.
Sale in a new fundraise
While this right is not a major redflag for the founders, it may act as an impediment to raise funds in the Company. In case such rights are exercised, a substantial portion of the investment will be provided to such existing investor leading to shortage of funds to the Company.
Liquidation Preference
Founders should be wary of the mechanism of liquidation preference clause. Some investors require more than 1x of their investment amount along with a participating liquidation preference, meaning, once they are provided with their investment amount, they will have a right to participate in distribution of funds to the other investors as well on a pro-rata basis. This is to the detriment of the other investors and especially founders, as, they are at the lower end of the liquidation preference recipients and leaves very little funds for distribution amongst the Founders.
Tag Along Right
Founders to ensure that in case they provide a tag along right to the Investors, they must provide only a proportionate tag along right, i.e., in the event the Founders transfer 10% of their shareholding in the Company, they facilitate only a 10% exit of such investor’s shareholding. Having a complete tag on Founder’s shares leaves very little opportunity for the Founders to procure liquidity on their shares.
Drag Along Right
Founders should ensure that while Investors have a right to drag all the shareholders (including the Founders), the Founders should get an exit on terms which are pari passu with the terms provided to such dragging investors for their shares.
Conclusion
In conclusion, ensuring safeguards for the Founders/Company in the exit clauses of shareholders’ agreements is not merely a legal formality, but crucial for the interests and vision of the Company. These provisions ensure that founders retain a degree of benefit from the company’s growth, even as they navigate the complex waters of investment and potential corporate events such as mergers/acquisition. This careful consideration of exit strategies reflects a mature approach to entrepreneurship, recognizing the importance of legal foresight in the unpredictable journey of business growth.
The process of projecting and predicting revenue, customers, workers, costs, etc. into the future in order to comprehend and evaluate the profitability and feasibility of the firm is known as financial modeling for startups. Since the firm is still in its early stages, this modeling will assist in creating the budget and business plan that they will be able to show to possible investors. Additionally, financial modeling helps startups monitor their performance against the financial plan by identifying areas of underperformance. This allows them to make the necessary adjustments to their strategy to ensure long-term sustainability and success. Finally, financial modeling helps startups set realistic goals for revenue growth and profitability. Therefore, entrepreneurs may ensure a bright and secure future for their organisation by developing a robust financial strategy. It considers revenue estimates, costs, and historical performance. A financial model aids in the informed decision-making of corporate stakeholders. Financial models are used by bankers, credit analysts, accountants, valuation advisers, and research analysts to assess a company’s financial viability.
A financial model is simply a tool that’s built-in Excel to forecast a business’ financial performance into the future. The forecast is typically based on the company’s historical performance, assumptions about the future, and requires preparing an income statement, balance sheet, and cash flow statement. Financial modeling is the process of estimating the financial performance of a company or business by taking into account all relevant factors, including growth and risk assumptions, and interpreting their impact. It enables the user to acquire a concise knowledge of the current financial position of the company and its projected growth, and a clear understanding of the financial forecasts.
Advantages of building a financial model for startups
There are multiple advantages given by financial modeling for startups which are as follows:
Planning and Forecasting of Finances Making precise financial estimates and projections is the goal of financial modeling for startups. It aids in both comprehending possible financial results and helping to create reasonable goals for the company. It enables startup owners to prepare for various contingencies and make well-informed choices depending on anticipated financial success.
Investing and Communicating with Investors It’s true that startups frequently need to raise money in order to expand. A thorough understanding of the company’s development potential, financial stability, and predicted profits is offered by a well-built financial model. It primarily serves to increase the startup’s credibility while pitching to possible investors. This indicates a deep comprehension of the monetary components of the nature of business.
Planning for Resources and Capital Allocation The best possible use of financial resources is made possible via financial modeling. Startups can find areas of high profitability, cost inefficiencies, and cash flow bottlenecks by examining the financial predictions. This facilitates their ability to deploy resources in a strategic manner, make well-informed investment decisions, and efficiently manage cash flow.
Evaluation and Reduction of Risks Startups may use financial modeling to undertake sensitivity analysis and evaluate how different risks and uncertainties affect the financial success of their company. Through the process of recognising possible risks and their associated financial repercussions, entrepreneurs may create backup plans and lessen the likelihood of unfavourable outcomes.
Evaluation and Outcome Plan Financial modelling is essential for figuring out a startup’s valuation when it comes to potential exit strategies like acquisitions or initial public offerings (IPOs). Startups can assess their worth and get better terms during investment rounds or exit talks by projecting their future financial performance.
Monitoring and Accountability of Performance In order to assess the real financial performance of the business, a financial model acts as a benchmark. By regularly updating the model with real financial data, business owners are able to track the company’s development, spot deviations from the plan, and move quickly to address them. It makes proactive decision-making easier and improves responsibility.
Making Strategic Decisions For startups, financial modeling offers an organized framework for assessing strategic choices. This enables business owners to evaluate the financial effects of different choices, including the introduction of new products, market expansions, price adjustments, infrastructure improvements, and technological investments. Making educated judgments that support the startup’s financial goals is another benefit.
Sample Financial Model for Startups
To ease the effort, Treelife is sharing a sample format of the financial model, which assists the founders/others to work out the outcome at one go. We believe that a financial model example should be clear, self-explanatory, and very pragmatic in its approach.
The output of a financial model is used for decision making and performing financial analysis, whether inside or outside of the company. Inside a company, executives will use financial models to make decisions about:
Types of Financial Model
Startups can use a variety of financial modeling techniques, some of which are listed below, to assess various elements of their business:
Model for Forecasting Revenue The main goal of this model is to project future startup income streams. To predict sales statistics over a certain time period, it considers variables including growth rates, pricing strategy, market size, and client acquisition. Models for revenue forecasting assist startups in assessing their future revenue and making plans appropriately.
Expense Model An expenditure model aids in the estimation and monitoring of operational costs for a startup. Together with variable costs like marketing expenditures and cost of goods supplied, it mostly consists of fixed costs like utilities, payroll, rent, and so forth. Expense models assist startups in determining their cost structure, prospects for cost savings, and efficient cash flow management.
Model of Cash Flow Because it evaluates the availability and timing of capital inflows as well as withdrawals, the cash flow model is crucial for startups. A cash flow model follows every transaction that occurs in the business’s cash flow. This covers elements like financial commitments, outlays, earnings, and other funding sources. It helps new businesses to prepare ahead for any financial constraints, manage their cash flow, and making informed decisions about funding requirements
Valuation Model The value of a startup is ascertained using valuation models. The process of estimating a business’s worth takes into account a number of variables, including market dynamics, financial performance, growth potential, and similar firm values. Startups may utilize valuation models to better understand their present worth, which is helpful when seeking funding, having M&A talks, or thinking through exit possibilities.
Fundraising and Financing Models Funding is necessary for startups to sustain their expansion. The selection of funding choices, such as debt financing, equity financing, or government subsidies, is aided by finance and fundraising models. These models are useful for understanding how various funding possibilities affect company characteristics including ownership dilution, capital structure, and financial indicators.
Investment Models and ROI Investment models and ROI (Return on Investment) assess the prospective profits and financial viability of certain projects or investment possibilities. These models may be used by startups to evaluate the feasibility of introducing new products, making infrastructure investments, or entering new markets. Prioritizing resource allocation and making educated investment decisions are made easier with the use of ROI and investment models.
Methods Used in Financial Modelling
Financial modelling may be done in a variety of ways, depending on the particular demands and specifications of a business. Four popular methods for financial modelling that have been considered are as follows:
Analyzing Historical Data This kind of strategy includes looking at previous financial data, which aids in understanding the performance and patterns of the companies in the past. It comprises compiling financial accounts, transaction records, and other pertinent information from earlier time periods. Startups are able to estimate future financial success by using patterns, growth rates, and seasonality that may be found in past data.
Bottom-Up Method The financial model is constructed using the bottom-up method, taking into account certain operational factors and hypotheses. Startups begin by projecting several aspects of their business, such as average revenue per client, units sold, and the number of customers. Then, cash flow, revenue, and costs are computed using these assumptions. This methodology facilitates a finer-grained examination and an in-depth comprehension of the many influences on the financial statements.
Modelling Based on Scenarios The creation of several financial models based on several scenarios or hypotheses is facilitated by scenario-based modelling. Startups can analyse the possible financial results under various conditions and create best-case, moderate-case, and worst-case scenarios. With this specific strategy, companies may evaluate their financial stability and make plans for a range of unforeseen events. It also aids in assessing the influence. It also aids in assessing how adjustments to important variables or outside influences affect the company’s financial performance.
Building a Startup Financial Model (Step-by-Step Guide)
Collect Information and Data First, gather all pertinent startup-related financial and non-financial data. This contains any other information required to comprehend the company and its activities, such as financial statements, market research, historical transaction records, and industry benchmarks.
Describe the Goal of the Model Make sure you understand the goals and parameters of the startup finance model. Ascertain the model’s unique queries or scenarios, such as those pertaining to finance needs, revenue forecasts, or value analyses. This will assist in directing the financial model’s emphasis and structure.
Make Decisions Using the Model Make decisions by using the financial model as a tool. It is for determining the effects of strategic decisions, analysing various situations, and coming to well-informed conclusions regarding the operations, expansion plans, and funding requirements of the business. A startup’s changing demands might be better met by having the model reviewed and updated on a frequent basis.
Project Outlay of Funds Calculate the startup’s operational costs, which include fixed costs like utilities, rent, payroll, etc., as well as variable costs like cost of goods sold, marketing, etc. Divide spending into appropriate categories, then create formulae or computations to forecast spending in the future based on the determined hypotheses.
Make a statement of profit and loss. Make a profit and loss (P&L) statement that lists the startup’s costs, earnings, and profitability for a given time period, preferably monthly or annually. Make sure that the P&L statement appropriately reflects all income and expense elements, such as taxes, depreciation, and interest costs.
Construct a Cash Flow Forecast Create a cash flow prediction that estimates your costs and income. Cash inflows from investments, financing operations, and income must be included in this prediction, as well as cash outflows for capital expenditures, debt repayment, and costs. Take into account the cash flow schedule and budget for any potential gaps in the cash flow.
Create a Balance Sheet Create a balance sheet that lists the assets, liabilities, and shareholders’ equity for the startup. Assets and liabilities, including cash, inventory, accounts receivable, debt, and equity, must be included. Over time, take into account further changes in assets and liabilities to make sure the balance sheet stays in balance.
Record Assumptions and Techniques Provide a detailed account of all the methods, computations, and assumptions that went into the financial model. The ease of updating, transparency, and comprehension of the model by others are all ensured by this documentation.
Verify and Enhance By comparing the forecasts to actual facts and making necessary adjustments to the assumptions, you can continuously evaluate and improve the financial model. Add real financial data to the model and evaluate how accurate the forecasts are. Update the financial model on a regular basis to account for fresh data or modifications to the startup’s situation.
Perform an analysis of sensitivity. To find out how changes to important variables and assumptions would affect the financial model, perform sensitivity analysis. Examine various situations and determine how adjustments to income, costs, or other factors impact the startup’s cash flow and financial success. This analysis aids in determining the most important risks and drivers.
Assumptions employed in Financial Modeling
The financial modelling for startups is based on the following assumptions:
Cost Presumptions The price at which the startup will sell its goods or services is determined in part by these pricing assumptions. Value-based pricing, cost-plus pricing, competitive analysis, and any other pertinent variables serve as the foundation for this. Pricing hypotheses need to take into account the target market, positioning, and profitability goals of the company.
Growth Rate of Revenue For the purpose of forecasting future sales, revenue growth rate assumptions are made. This is predicated on past performance, market research, industry trends, or the development plan of the startup. It is crucial to take into account elements like price strategy, client acquisition, market share, and prospective market expansion.
Working Capital Premises Estimating the startup’s short-term assets and liabilities is made easier with the aid of working capital assumptions. Inventory, accounts payable, accounts receivable, and other operating assets and liabilities are included in this. Working capital predictions are influenced by assumptions regarding supplier relationships, inventory turnover, payment terms, and collection timeframes.
Tax Presumptions Estimating the relevant tax rates and any tax breaks or incentives that the startup may be eligible for is made easier with the use of tax assumptions. Depending on the jurisdiction and the startup’s eligibility for particular tax incentives, different tax assumptions may apply.
Financial Premises Monitoring anticipated capital inflows and outflows is made easier with the use of financing assumptions. Assumptions on debt financing, equity financing, and other funding sources may be included in this. In order to evaluate the effects, startups must estimate the terms, time, and quantity of funding operations.
Running Costs When predicting the startup’s cost structure, operating expense assumptions are crucial. Assumptions regarding wages, rent, utilities, marketing expenditures, administrative fees, and any other operational expenses are included in this. When assessing these costs, startups might take into account anticipated investments, industry benchmarks, or previous data.
Investments in Capital Assumptions made about capital expenditures are related to investments made in long-term assets including machinery, infrastructure, technology, and buildings. Based on their expansion goals and operational needs, startups must project the time and cost of capital expenditures. The life expectancy and depreciation of assets must be taken into account.
Why Entrepreneurs should prefer a Financial Model?
Entrepreneurs should concentrate on creating a financial model for a number of reasons :
It Aids in Making Decisions An analytical framework in the form of a financial model helps entrepreneurs make well-informed company decisions. It enables people to weigh potential outcomes, determine the financial implications of alternative plans of action, and select the best solutions. A financial model directs entrepreneurs towards making decisions that are consistent with their aims and objectives by helping them comprehend the financial effects of their actions.
Allocation of Resources A financial model aids entrepreneurs in allocating resources as efficiently as possible inside their firm. Entrepreneurs may find inefficiencies, manage cash flow, and deploy resources wisely by predicting revenue, costs, and cash flow. It helps business owners prioritise investments, keep expenditures under control, and make the most use of their existing resources by offering insights into the financial consequences of various options.
Investing and Raising Money A strong financial model is necessary when looking for outside investment or funding. Financial predictions are usually required by lenders and investors to evaluate the viability and possible return on investment. A strong financial model shows that the entrepreneur is aware of the financial dynamics, potential for growth, and capacity for profit-making of the company. It boosts investor confidence and raises the likelihood of obtaining capital or investment.
Hazard Assessment A financial model aids in the efficient risk management of enterprises. Through the use of sensitivity analysis and scenario planning, entrepreneurs may get insight into the financial ramifications of several risks, including shifts in market dynamics, pricing strategies, or operational elements. With the use of a financial model, business owners may recognize possible hazards, create backup plans, and decide on the best course of action to reduce them.
Monitoring Performance When comparing the actual financial performance of a startup to its expectations, a financial model acts as a benchmark. Entrepreneurs are able to track their progress, spot deviations from the plan, and take necessary corrective action by periodically updating the model with real-world data. It helps with performance monitoring, improves accountability, and makes it possible for business owners to quickly resolve any financial problems.
Extended-Term Scheduling Entrepreneurs may set realistic goals for their firm and prepare for the long run with the help of a financial model. Through the process of financial performance projection, entrepreneurs are able to appraise the viability of their company ideas, analyse methods for expansion, and determine the necessary funds to reach their goals. A financial model helps entrepreneurs create a precise and workable strategy by acting as a roadmap for the startup’s financial future.
Monitoring Performance When comparing the actual financial performance of a startup to its expectations, a financial model acts as a benchmark. Entrepreneurs are able to track their progress, spot deviations from the plan, and take necessary corrective action by periodically updating the model with real-world data. It helps with performance monitoring, improves accountability, and makes it possible for business owners to quickly resolve any financial problems.
Extended-Term Scheduling Entrepreneurs may set realistic goals for their firm and prepare for the long run with the help of a financial model. Through the process of financial performance projection, entrepreneurs are able to appraise the viability of their company ideas, analyse methods for expansion, and determine the necessary funds to reach their goals. A financial model helps entrepreneurs create a precise and workable strategy by acting as a roadmap for the startup’s financial future.
Strategies for Valuation and Exit When seeking funding, forming alliances, or thinking about exit strategies, entrepreneurs frequently need to estimate the startup’s worth. By anticipating future financial performance, cash flow, and profitability, a financial model is essential to determining the startup’s worth. By giving them knowledge of the financial factors that influence valuation, it enables business owners to make well-informed choices regarding expansion, funding, and possible exits.
What is Slidebean financial model template?
Investors at Carao Ventures have built a financial model template in Excel, which evolved into the spreadsheet utilised in the slidebean financial model. They’ve modified it over time to fit our SaaS business model and made it simpler by removing components that aren’t essential. The article’s bottom contains a download link, and it goes into detail on the key components we employed to make the model function well for us—that is, for the majority of businesses.
Conclusion
The financial model in India is utilized in a number of stages in the operations of the entities. It combines finance, accounting, and business metrics to create a mathematical representation of the growth prospects of the entity. Financial modeling is a highly valued tool and benefits the entity in numerous ways
Here are some highlights of the Indian Interim Budget 2024:
Focus on Infrastructure Development: The government has allocated significant funds for building highways, railways, airports, and other critical infrastructure projects to achieve the vision of ‘Viksit Bharat’ (Developed India) by 2047 https://innovateindia.mygov.in/viksitbharat2047/. This push for infrastructure spending is expected to create jobs and boost overall economic growth.
Boost to Social Welfare Schemes: The budget aims to uplift people out of poverty by increasing spending on social welfare programs like education, healthcare, and poverty alleviation. This focus on social welfare should benefit a large portion of the Indian population.
Investment in Research and Innovation: The government announced a corpus of ₹1 lakh crore to provide long-term financing for research and development in sunrise sectors. This initiative is expected to propel India’s technological advancements and self-reliance (Atmanirbharta) https://pib.gov.in/PressReleaseIframePage.aspx?PRID=1845882.
Measures for Sustainable Development: The budget promotes sustainability through initiatives like rooftop solarization. A target has been set to enable one crore households to generate their own solar power and potentially even sell surplus electricity back to the grid. This scheme is likely to increase clean energy adoption and reduce dependence on fossil fuels.
Support for MSMEs and Farmers: The budget proposes measures to support small businesses (MSMEs) and farmers. This may include tax breaks for MSMEs and continued financial assistance to farmers under schemes like PM-KISAN. These initiatives are expected to give a leg up to these crucial sectors of the Indian economy.
Critical Factors in Initial Public Offering (IPO) Outcomes: Lessons from Past IPOs
Navigating the complexities of an IPO is a pivotal moment for companies, with the potential for significant growth and capital increase. Companies aiming to transition from private to public spheres have encountered a variety of challenges, yet there have also been remarkable stories of triumph. In this article, we deep dive into the successes and challenges of previous public listings.
IPO
Key factor
What went wrong?
Learnings
Zomato
Valuation
When Zomato, India’s first unicorn to venture public, made its debut on the National Stock Exchange, its shares surged, opening at a staggering 52.63% premium. This catapulted the company’s market capitalisation beyond the INR 1 lakh crore mark. After a promising debut on the National Stock Exchange, Zomato’s shares took a significant hit, falling to a low of Rs 46 in July nearly 40 per cent down from its issue price of Rs 76. Such a decline moved closer to expert evaluations that pegged the company’s genuine share value at around Rs 41.
Realistic valuations of companies planning to launch an IPOs are of paramount importance for both investors and the companies aiming to go public. Overvaluations might result in unrealistic expectations and potential future corrections, which could dent investor confidence. On the other hand, a firm grounded in its intrinsic value will likely offer more stability and transparency to its shareholders.
OYO
Good governance and Transparency
The case of OYO, a prominent hospitality company in India, serves as an example of the challenges that can arise when governance and transparency are perceived to be inadequate. OYO’s journey towards an IPO has been fraught with scrutiny, primarily due to concerns regarding its governance practices and the clarity of its business operations. Questions have been raised about the sustainability of its growth, the clarity of its revenue model, and the management’s decision-making processes. Legal disputes and questions about its asset-light business model have further compounded these concerns, leading to a delay in its IPO plans.
Good governance and transparency are paramount in the complex process of launching an IPO, as they instill confidence among potential investors and ensure a fair and smooth transition to the public market. Good governance involves the establishment of robust internal controls, adherence to ethical standards, and accountability to all stakeholders, while transparency requires clear and honest communication about the company’s financial health, business model, and potential risks. For companies looking to go public, the lesson from OYO’s experience is clear – prioritize good governance and transparency, not just as a means to facilitate a successful IPO, but as a fundamental business practice. This commitment to ethical practices and clear communication is crucial for building trust with investors and laying the groundwork for long-term success in the public domain.
IPO
Key factor
What went right?
Learnings
Avenue Supermarket
Right timing
The IPO of Avenue Supermarts Ltd, which operates the DMart chain of supermarkets in India, serves as an illustrative example. The company went public in March 2017, a period that was characterized by a strong bull market in India. The IPO was priced at INR 299 per share, and due to the positive market conditions and strong fundamentals of the company, it received an overwhelming response from investors. On its debut on the stock exchanges, the stock listed at INR 604, a 102% premium over its issue price. Investors who had participated in the IPO were rewarded with substantial gains, showcasing the importance of choosing the right time to invest in an IPO.
Companies aspiring to go public should aim to initiate their IPO during a bullish market, where stock prices are climbing, and investor optimism is palpable. Moreover, a stable or rising interest rate environment is preferable for launching an IPO. During such periods, the financial markets are generally considered to be in a healthy state, inspiring confidence among investors. From the company’s perspective, strategically timing the IPO to align with favorable market conditions can significantly enhance the success of the public offering. It not only helps in maximizing the capital raised but also contributes to establishing a strong investor base and a positive market perception, which are vital for the company’s long-term growth and stability in the public domain.
Conclusion:
Embarking on an IPO journey necessitates a careful balance of several critical elements to ensure success and sustainability in the public domain. Companies must prioritize realistic valuations, uphold the principles of good governance, effectively communicate their value proposition, and choose the right market conditions to launch their public offering. The examples of Zomato, Paytm, and others in the Indian context underscore the varying outcomes that can result from this complex process, demonstrating that while the rewards of a successful IPO can be substantial, the road to achieving it is fraught with challenges. Ultimately, for companies aiming to make a successful transition to the public markets, a combination of transparency, accountability, ethical decision-making, and strategic timing emerges as the indispensable formula for success.
In the corporate environment today, you may often come across the term “POSH”. Whether the company you’re working at is talking about it, or the HR is circulating a document called “POSH Policy”, or you hear about a POSH Committee, or learn about someone initiating action under the POSH Act.
But do you know what POSH is? What does it stand for? Who can claim under POSH and when? What are your rights and how does it impact you? What can you do in a POSH-related situation?
If the answer is no, here’s a quick read giving you the basics of POSH.
Sexual harassment in workplaces is a global issue, including in India. However, as India was a very patriarchal country, women oriented laws were few. Sexual Harassment against women was also majorly neglected in our country until about a decade ago when Supreme Court and the Government of India finally took some measures and regularised it by passing a legislation called: “Sexual Harasment of Women at Workplace (Prevention, Prohibition and Redressal) Act, 2013”, better known as “POSH” Act.
Physical contact or advances
Making sexually coloured remarks
Demand or request for sexual favours
Eve-teasing and any other unwelcome physical, verbal or non-verbal conduct of a sexual nature
Showing Pornography
Staring, leering, obscene gestures, making kissing sounds, licking lips
Stalking, blocking, cornering
Implied or explicit preferential treatment or threat about jobs
Making work discussions sound sexual and using innuendos
Physical assault and molestation
So what is not sexual harassment?
While sexual harassment can encompass a wide range of behaviours, there are certain actions and interactions that, in isolation, may not be considered sexual harassment. Here are some examples of such actions:
Compliments: Giving compliments or making polite comments about someone’s appearance or attire, as long as they are respectful and not objectifying.
Single, Non-Offensive Jokes: Telling a single, non-offensive joke that has a sexual theme may not necessarily be sexual harassment, especially if it’s not directed at someone in a demeaning or offensive way.
Non-Sexual Touching: Non-sexual physical contact, like a friendly hug or handshake.
Whether something constitutes sexual harassment often depends on the context, intent, and impact it has on the victim.
Where can an incident occur?
Any department, organization, undertaking, establishment, enterprise institution, office or branch unit of the Company.
Any place visited by the employee during the course of employment, including the following:
Cafeteria
Meeting room
Staircase
Premises
Car Park
Elevator
Cabins
Cab
Online or over the phone
What is a POSH Policy?
Every employer with female employees is required to adopt and enforce a POSH Policy elaborating on its scope, acts considered as sexual harassment covered, applicability, complaint and redressal mechanism,details and contact information of POSH committee members.
Today, a lot of organisations internationally are embracing a gender neutral and “all inclusive” policy, to protect every individual employee from sexual harassment regardless of their gender or orientation or identity.
What’s a POSH Internal Committee?
It’s a committee appointed by employers with more than 10 employees including female employees, comprised of 4 members, with atleast 50% women, one being an external independent member, to whom any victim can complain about any incident of sexual harassment.
The Committee’s responsibility is to acknowledge the complaint filed, investigate and prepare a report with details of the incident, and to recommend a suitable course of action to the employer.
What to do if you are a victim but your organisation does not have a POSH Internal committee?
If your organisation is not required to appoint a committee under the law, or has failed to appoint, you can always file a complaint with the Local Committee, appointed for each District by the respective State Government.
What to do if you have a complaint?
Complaints can be filed with IC within 3 months of the incident or the last incident in a series. IC can extend this period up to 3 months for any valid reasons.
If a complainant is physically incapacitated, a complaint can be lodged with their prior written consent by a relative, friend, co-worker, an officer of the NCW or SCW, or any individual with knowledge of the incident.
If a complainant is mentally incapacitated, a complaint can be made with their prior written consent by a relative, friend, special educator, qualified psychiatrist, psychologist, guardian, authority responsible for their care, or any person knowledgeable about the incident.
If a complainant has passed away, a complaint can be filed with the prior written consent of the deceased employee’s legal heir or any designated person.
If the complaint is made to an employee (not a member of the IC), the employee shall promptly report it to the IC.
What actions can the Internal Committee recommend and/or employer take against the offender / accused?
Censure or reprimand
Written warning
Withholding promotion and/or increments
Suspension
Termination
Deduction of compensation payable to the victim
Community service or counseling
Or any other action that the management and/or the board of directors of the Company may deem fit.
What to do if you are a witness or a colleague?
As observers or witnesses:
Intervene If Safe
Document What Was Seen
Support the Victim
Report the Harassment
As colleagues:
Create a Supportive Environment
Encourage Reporting
Cooperate with Investigations
Respect Privacy
Maintain confidentiality
What not to do?
Do NOT ignore it – reporting is essential
Do NOT accept inappropriate or uncomfortable behaviour
Do NOT retaliate or mock the victim – Instead be supportive, instead of socially ostracizing or demeaning or intimidating the victim
The confidentiality of all aspects related to the complaint has to be strictly maintained. Do not disclose this information to the public or media in any way.
The internal committee possesses the authority to initiate actions against the accused when found guilty and against the complainant in the event that false claims are proven.
Any party not satisfied by the recommendations of IC, can appeal to the appellate authority within 90 (ninety) days of the recommendations being communicated.
Conclusion
It is every employer’s duty to provide a safe working space to all employees, and the Internal Committee is obligated to not only redress complaints but also ensure sexual harassment is prevented and does not happen at the workplaces. All complaints and proceedings
Our Engagement: We worked with the company right from incorporation through till the acquisition in various engagements of legal, finance, compliance and advisory. We closely reviewed the founders exit, the acquisition and liaised for regulatory of their international expansion.
Actions carried out:
Setting up the entire initial finance and legal framework and executing it.
Represented the company in their due diligence and legal functions while raising their investment rounds.
Liaise with global consulting firms and legal firms to explore setting up the international business.
Represent interest of founder and company along with other firms consulting on a transaction
Impact:
Considering our robust initial setup of the processes, it was easier to migrate the legal and financial processes inhouse at scale.
Our deep understanding of the business since the inception made us a key PoC for stakeholders to validate their ideas from a regulatory perspective.
High vote of confidence in key business decisions of the company.
Expanding your startup into foreign markets presents a global business expansion opportunity that can be daunting yet rewarding. It’s important to keep an informed eye on regulations, compliance, and technical aspects of the countries you want to venture into. The reasons for international business expansion are many. However, before extending your global footprint, startups must address the following key compliance considerations to be global business ready:
International Investment Regulation Compliance
Establishing lawful compliance with investment regulations and rules is a key factor in setting up a business internationally. Private capital investment structuring is vital for raising funds through Alternative Investment Funds (AIFs). Startups should also consider bilateral and multilateral agreements that promote foreign investment and provide substantial protection to investors. The growth of international business is driven by these agreements and policy announcements that encourage businesses to invest in foreign markets, such as the Indian government’s recent directive allowing Indian startups to offer public listings in foreign markets.
CapOne Research Case Study
CapOne Research is a thriving fintech startup that launched in 2016 and uses blockchain and AI to design payment systems. The company’s founder initially planned to incorporate the business in the US but faced roadblocks with visa compliance and structuring expenses.
Instead, CapOne took advantage of Estonia’s Startup Programme, gaining access to EU-based venture capital markets and angel investors. The ease of business and personnel availability were key factors in the company’s growth. CapOne’s experience is a valuable lesson in understanding the opportunities and challenges of international business.
Data Protection and Policy
Data protection and policy regulations vary between countries. It’s essential to adhere to strict data privacy guidelines and ensure proper security measures are in place. Incorporating the latest advancements in technology, such as blockchain and AI, to design payment systems provides exceptional opportunities for global business expansion.
As companies handle and process personal data, it is crucial to ensure strict compliance with processing guidelines under EU-GDPR privacy regulations, which are now considered a global standard for privacy protection. To comply with these regulations, business entities that handle personal data must follow specific consent, disclosure, and collection mechanisms. Moreover, these regulations may restrict the transfer of data outside the region from where it was collected.
Data privacy law and compliance are at the forefront of not just the technology industry but also the service and sales industry to ensure the free, fair, and safe processing of sensitive consumer data. Indian startups such as Paytm have taken positive steps to match global giants like Google and Facebook in ensuring data welfare and protection.
Paytm and Privacy Case Study
Paytm recognizes that in an era where data is ‘the new gold,’ regulatory authorities must create a strong consumer data protection framework that respects the privacy concerns of citizens. Paytm deems all financial data (KYC, Aadhar, and other identification-related biodata) as ‘Critical Personal Data’ and takes measures to store and process the same within India alone.
Likewise, startups wanting to expand to foreign jurisdictions can expect to deal with regulations that enforce cooperation and compliance in matters of private data. Paytm has expanded to Canada and Japan and is compliant with related data privacy regulations – Canada’s Personal Information Protection and Electronic Documents Act (PIPEDA) and Japan’s Act for Protection of Personal Information (APPI).
To summarize, the basic tenets that an enterprise must follow to ensure data protection include accountability, consent, limitation of use, disclosure, and retention, and data security systems.
Human Resources & Labour Law Compliance
Startups expanding into new markets must comply with local labour laws regarding employment contracts, minimum wage, and working hours. Companies must also be mindful of cultural differences in regards to communication and working styles. The advantages of expanding a business internationally are vast, but understanding the challenges and opportunities of international business is critical to success.
Each jurisdiction has specifics and standards on HR and Labour law that need to be incorporated into employee contracts and other agreements on personnel and conduct. Anti-Corruption policies and Insider Trading Disclosure mechanisms need to be in place to regulate fair and lawful business conduct. Startups that enter new countries often take advantage of ‘floating employee’ arrangements that constitute a network of consultants and independent contractors.
Intellectual Property
Intellectual property protection laws, such as patents, trademarks, and copyrights, differ between countries. Startups must protect their intellectual property by adhering to proper regulations to prevent infringement. Avoiding problems in international business is possible by investing in the right legal expertise and understanding the comprehensive international expansion strategy.
It is important to refile for intellectual property, such as trademarks, copyrights or patents, in a new territory to ensure global recognition. The business may either apply for the same individually in each country or go for a comprehensive filling such as that offered by the EU Intellectual Property regime that holds valid for all European Union countries. Trademark incorporation and registration in North America, as done by giants such as Flipkart and Myntra, is a route preferred not only to ease tax burdens in India but also to increase valuation and reputation in business.
Case Study
A very well-known startup in India recently started expanding in the UK and posted vacancy ads on LinkedIn. The public, at large, including some prospective recruiters mistook this Indian startup for a UK-based startup that had a similar sounding name. This came into the eyes of the UK-based startup and rounds of to and fro legal notices were ensued on the Indian startup. This delayed the Indian startup’s expansion plans and also cost a substantial legal fee on top of settlement offers for coexisting in the UK market.
Tax Obligations
Startups must also be aware of tax laws and obligations when operating in a foreign market. These can vary significantly depending on the nature of business and location. Engaging with authorities at different levels including legal and taxation experts will help startups establish a scalable international business expansion.
Tax structuring and management may help minimize tax obligations. Ensure that taxes deducted at the source such as employee payment and post-sale/service VAT are dealt with in a timely manner. Different geographies are subject to different rates and methods of taxation, with jurisdictions even incentivizing small to medium business entities that can take advantage of international agreements between states that support and ease business activities.
The Vodafone Tax Case: A Case Study on Global Expansion & Taxation
Vodafone International, a leading telecom giant based in Amsterdam, acquired Hutchison Telecommunications International Limited (HTIL), based in Hong Kong, by acquiring its subsidiary, CGP Investments (Holdings) Ltd based in the Cayman Islands. However, Vodafone’s entry to the Indian market through Hutch brought them under the Indian Income Tax authorities’ radar for Capital Gains Tax on CGP. As CGP was not based in India but held essential Indian asset companies in operation, a legislative change introduced in India, called ‘Retrospective Taxation,’ presented Vodafone with a liability of over INR 22,100 Cr.
Vodafone faced a prolonged legal battle in the highest Indian courts before the recent International Tribunal hearing. Vodafone was able to plead protection under India-Netherlands Bilateral Investment Protection Agreement (BIPA), and the tribunal ruled that India had breached its ‘guarantee of fair and equitable treatment.’
Exploring acquisition opportunities or joint ventures with established businesses in foreign markets can help startups navigate local regulations and establish a strong foothold in the market. Acquiring the right companies with the right international business expansion examples create both opportunities and challenges of international business from which startups can learn.
Acquiring foreign entities in similar fields to allow for expansion is now a popular way of global expansion for India’s biggest startups. One example is when Oyo acquired Amsterdam-based Leisure Group for €369.5 Mn, while Byju’s acquired US-based ‘Osmo’ for $120 Mn, making it the world’s biggest EdTech company.
InMobi Goes International: A Case Study
InMobi is a mobile advertising company that rose from humble beginnings in 2007 as an SMS-based service to become India’s first unicorn startup company. To extend its growth and resources, InMobi sought to operate in new markets by expanding resource and technical partnerships.
In 2018, InMobi strategically partnered with telecom giant ‘Sprint’ for digital marketing and data services to make inroads in the US market. Setting up offices in locations such as Kansas City and San Francisco, it acquired Pinsight Media, the mobile advertising branch of Sprint that operates and advertises across verticals, including consumer goods, retail, entertainment, and finance. The acquisition of Pinsight offers InMobi an infrastructure to combine network mobile services and integrating customer information, helping companies better target ads on smartphones to the right audiences. Naveen Tewari, Founder and CEO at InMobi, said, “this industry-first acquisition allows InMobi and Sprint to work on our respective strengths together and provides a global template for partnerships between advertising platforms and telcos.”
Conclusion
Expanding your startup globally can offer significant opportunities and pave the way for the growth of international business. Understanding the necessary compliance and regulations upfront is critical. Incorporating in business-conducive territories or exploring a startup accelerator program can be viable options for startups looking to go global. The opportunities and challenges of international business are numerous, but with the right international expansion strategy, startups can find success.
FAQ’s
Q: What is the major reason for international business expansion?
A: The major reason for international business expansion is to increase the market share, gain new customers, exploit new opportunities and diversify the risks involved in operating a business.
Q: What is an international business expansion example?
A: An example of international business expansion is when a company based in the United States establishes store locations in other countries such as China, Japan, and Italy.
Q: What are the four types of international business?
A: The four types of international business are exporting, licensing, franchising, and direct investment.
Q: What are the 5 stages of international business?
A: The five stages of international business are no direct foreign market involvement, export via an independent representative, the establishment of sales subsidiaries, production and sales subsidiaries, and a global service provider.
Q: What to consider when expanding a business internationally?
A: When expanding a business internationally, factors to consider are market conditions, cultural differences, currency exchange rates, taxes and tariffs, language barriers, legal and regulatory requirements, and logistics and infrastructure.
What is Tyke? Founded in 2021, Tyke claims to be a private investment gateway that enables private capital transactions in a seamless manner. With a ticket size as low as INR 5,000, Tyke enables individuals to become angel investors and invest in startups. This opens up the angel investing market to a large community of investors, which was earlier restricted to a small circle of HNIs.
This also allows startups to raise capital from a larger pool of investors.
For the above services, as per their website, Tyke charges a standard listing fee from the startup and a success fee on the total amount raised via a successful campaign. Further, it also charges a 2% convenience fee on the subscription amount. It does not charge anything from the investors.
In a short span of two years, Tyke has impressively mobilized over INR 100 crore via 200+ campaigns. The rising public fascination with platforms like Shark Tank further fuels this enthusiasm towards the startup ecosystem.
Startups can launch various campaigns on Tykeinvest, ranging from CCD and CCPS to CSOP, NCD, and Invoice Discounting campaigns.
While CCDs and CCPS offer investors a seat at the startup’s cap table, Tyke accentuates that their Community Stock Option Plan (CSOP) doesn’t influence the company’s cap table. They describe CSOP as a contractual agreement executed between a subscriber (investor) and the startup which entitles the subscriber to community benefits and the potential to be granted Stock Appreciation Rights.
Recent MCA order in the case of SustVest which raised funds on Tyke
Gurugram-based ‘Solargridx Ventures Private Limited’ (“the Company”), in its bid to attract investments, used the CSOP campaign on the Tyke platform under the brand name ‘SustVest’. It managed to raise around ~INR 52 lakhs from more than 500 investors through this campaign.
The Company issued 6,186 CSOPs to 565 subscribers. The Company issued the CSOPs for a subscription fee of INR 1,000 inclusive of applicable taxes and GST. Invoices were issued to the subscribers for such fee. The Company treated the revenue received from CSOPs of INR 52.42 lakhs under the head of “other income” and paid 18% GST on the same as was filled in the GSTR3B return for the month of March 2022.
However, the MCA issued an order against the Company on September 22, 2023, imposing a total penalty of INR 10 lakhs on the Company and the 3 directors for breach of section 42 of the Companies Act, 2013 (“CA 2013”). The MCA has also asked the Company to refund the total money received of ~INR 52 lakhs along with interest of ~INR 7 lakhs to the investors.
The crux here was: Do CSOPs issued by the Company classify as “securities”? If so, this would necessitate the Company’s compliance with section 42 of the CA 2013, which pertains to the ‘Issue of shares on a Private Placement basis’.
Key Matters of Contention
1. Whether CSOPs can be regarded as a “security”
The first and key matter of contention is whether the CSOPs issued should be classified as “securities” or not. If yes, the MCA has alleged that the Company has not complied with the provisions of section 42 of the CA 2013 dealing with ‘Issue of shares on a Private Placement basis’. Section 42 of the CA 2013 is reproduced in Annexure 1.
Before discussing the arguments on this matter by both parties, it is imperative to understand the term “security”.
The term “security” is defined in section 2(81) of the CA 2013 where it directs us to section 2(h) of the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956. Reading these two laws in conjunction, broadly, “securities” includes derivatives which, in turn, includes:
(A) a security derived from a debt instrument, share, loan, whether secured or unsecured, risk instrument or contract for differences or any other form of security
(B) a contract which derives its value from the prices, or index of prices, of underlying securities
An extract of the relevant sections from the CA 2013, and the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956 are reproduced in Annexure 1.
Company’s contention
The Company submitted that CSOPs are merely an agreement by the company to engage its Subscribers / Evangelists through a closed community with a view to grow the customer base and business. The company aims to leverage the network effect created through this community to achieve its objectives, including increased sales, improved brand identity, better adaptation to new trends, and reliable user feedback.
The Company partnered with Tyke, a technology-based community platform, to conduct an online pitching session to introduce itself to Tyke members and educate them about its achievements and growth prospects. After the pitching session, the Company created a closed group for subscribers to access the community benefits and perform the role of evangelizers on behalf of the Company. Thus, according to the Company, it can be seen that it has neither released any public advertisements nor utilized any media, marketing or distribution channels or agents to inform the public at large about such an issue of securities.
Further, the amounts received from the subscribers are in the nature of ‘membership fees’ and invoices have been raised by the Company. Such amounts are shown under the head “other income“ and offered to tax as such. Further, GST has also been paid on such income.
The Company submitted that CSOP does not derive its value from any underlying variable like share price/ stock index. To qualify as “rights or interest in securities” there has to be an underlying security that is absent in the present facts.
MCA’s contention
The MCA pointed out that the CSOP holders were ostensibly promised that they would be rewarded based on future valuation of the Company. Further, the financial statements unequivocally declare that CSOP holders would be able to unlock value based on future valuation.
The CSOP agreement submitted by the Company had the following key clauses:
•The payout amount to the CSOP holders means settlement paid by the Company by way of cash, by way of equity securities, or partly cash and partly equity securities.
•The total amount to be paid to a CSOP Holder for the CSOP, upon the occurrence of a Payment Event, shall be equal to the number of CSOPs multiplied by the Ratio of the Fair Market Value of an Equity Security determined in the Liquidity Event or at the time of exercise of the CSOPs by the CSOP Holders as may be intimated by the Company
•Each CSOP is equal to the proportionate amount of Equity Securities as on the pre-money valuation of the Company of INR 4,10,00,000.
•Any restructuring undertaken by the Company will adjust the payout of the CSOP holders
Thus, according to MCA, the value of the CSOPs is linked to the equity securities at inception stage, capital restructuring stage and payout stage. CSOPs also have other trappings of securities like transferability, maintenance of a register, etc as per the agreement.
The MCA, also reached out to the subscribers to give their comments/views along with documents supplied to them by the Company for cross verification. Reply from one the subscribers, enclosing a copy of the email received from Tyke clearly suggested that the said subscriber had got an “invite to invest” in the subject company through the Tyke platform.
In light of the above, as per the MCA, CSOP is clearly a ‘derivative’ as it derives its value from equity shares and thus should be treated as a “security” requiring the Company to comply with the provisions of section 42 of the CA 2013.
Ourthoughts
The issue isn’t simply about labelling the CSOPs but understanding their inherent nature. If an instrument behaves like a security and is perceived as such by its holders, then it should be treated accordingly, irrespective of its nomenclature.
In this case, given the evidence at hand, it seems that the regulators’ view holds substantial merit. The CSOPs, by their very structure and intent, appear to have characteristics inherent to securities.
Applicability of IndAS
Company / Tyke’s contention
The Company submitted a legal opinion which was obtained by TYKE from one of the law firms which stated that the companies whose financials have been prepared in accordance with the provisions prescribed under ‘IndAS’ can issue CSOP and the same will not fall under the definition of securities.
Our thoughts
The Company is following the Indian GAAP and not IndAS, therefore the legal opinion does not apply to the Company.
Further, most Indian startups who raise money from platforms like Tyke are operating at a scale where they are not mandated to follow IndAS provisions. Refer Annexure 2 for details on applicability of IndAS
Applicability of SEBI guidelines
Tyke’s contention
In a recent article, Karan Mehra, Tyke’s CEO, says, “Understanding the legal landscape surrounding an instrument such as CSOP and SARs is imperative. In its interactions, SEBI has clarified that cash-settled SARs, like those under the CSOP agreement, fall outside the purview of specific SEBI regulations, being governed instead by the contractual terms and the Indian Contract Act ‘1872. Furthermore, they do not qualify as derivatives per the Securities Contract Regulation Act 1956. Similarly, from an accounting standpoint, SARs are meticulously governed by established standards, specifically Ind AS 102 and the Guidance Note on Accounting for Share-Based Payments issued by ICAI. This ensures transparency and adherence to best practices in financial reporting.”
In this article, the Tyke team reckons that CSOP is not merely an investment tool but a bridge connecting startups with evangelists who believe in their vision and mission. As stated in the legal opinion from Shardul Amarchand Mangaldas & Co., “CSOP is a contractual agreement where startups onboard persons to evangelize its brand, becoming a part of its community, and contributing to its growth and mission.”
They also added that CSOP “is not classified as a security, and it operates under the purview of the Contract Act”, thus remaining outside the SEBI purview. The legal opinion also elaborated by saying, “SEBI has clarified that SEBI (Share Based Employee Benefits) Regulations, 2014 would be inapplicable to any cash-settled option which is issued at a pre-determined grant price. This clarification enables listed companies to offer options at a pre-determined grant price without having to comply with any SEBI regulations.” On the other hand, the SAR is designed to allow stakeholders to benefit from appreciating a company’s stock value without the direct ownership or the associated complexities. In essence, it’s a way to reward those who believe in a company’s potential and future growth.
Income neutral treatment in the books of accounts
Company’s contention
In its submissions, the Company has claimed that the money raised from Tyke of INR 52.42 lakh has been offered to tax as CSOP Subscription Income in its profit and loss account. Further, GST has been paid on such income by the Company.
However, the Company has also booked an expense as “CSOP Expenditure” and has created a provision for “CSOP Liability” of the same amount.
Extracts of the financial statements of the Company for FY 21-22 are reproduced in Annexure 3.
Our thoughts
The CSOP subscription income and CSOP expenditure offset each other, resulting in an income-tax neutral impact on the Profit and Loss.
Tyke remains out of regulatory purview
What’s interesting is that Tyke, the platform facilitating these investments, hasn’t faced any penalties or regulatory actions.
This brings up questions about who is responsible for such new investment models and how intermediaries like Tyke fit into the regulatory landscape.
Conclusion
While platforms like Tyke are revolutionizing the investment landscape by educating startups and investors about the nuances of modern investments, it’s vital to tread with caution. By democratizing access to early-stage investments and pioneering novel financing structures, these platforms have broadened opportunities for many. However, startups and investors must approach these opportunities with a comprehensive grasp of the associated regulatory framework to avoid potential pitfalls. This ensures that the evolution of investment strategies remains both innovative and compliant.
While platforms like Tyke are revolutionizing the investment landscape by educating startups and investors about the nuances of modern investments, it’s vital to tread with caution. By democratizing access to early-stage investments and pioneering novel financing structures, these platforms have broadened opportunities for many. However, startups and investors must approach these opportunities with a comprehensive grasp of the associated regulatory framework to avoid potential pitfalls. This ensures that the evolution of investment strategies remains both innovative and compliant.
As the startup ecosystem continues to evolve, startups and investors must remain vigilant and proactive in addressing emerging regulatory issues especially while raising funds.
Timeline Of Events
Aug 2020 – Solargridx Ventures Private Limited was incorporated
Feb 2022 – Solargridx granted 6,186 CSOPs to 565 subscribers, raising INR 52.42 lakhs
March 02, 2022 – Company received the total subscription amount from Tyke
April 20, 2023 – MCA issued a Show Cause Notice (SCN) to the Company requesting reply why MCA should not impose penalty and take actions for violation of section 42 of the CA 2013
May 12, 2023 – The Company filed its 1st response to SCN and submitted a copy of an unsigned CSOP agreement (1st version of agreement). In the reply, the Company stated CSOPs were issued with intent to build brand loyalist and increase sales of its solar projects business, subscribers would receive community benefits, engaged with a closed community on Tyke platform and link shared with them separately, build goodwill. Company also submitted in the reply that no public advertisements or marketing or distribution channels were used to inform the public at large.
May 17, 2023 – 1st hearing before Adjudicating Officer (AO) attended by one of the Directors – and two Practicing Company Secretaries. Despite auditor’s (Nischal Agrawal) presence being requested by AO, he remained absent citing medical reasons but he filed a separate response via email in which he conveyed that the CSOP transaction was novel and thus he disclosed the transaction under “Emphasis of Matter” based on management’s representation.
Further, at the hearing the AO had directed the Company to provide following additional information:
i) list of subscribers to the CSOP;
ii) copy of 5 signed CSOP agreements with subscribers
iii) Basis for treating amount received from subscribers as ‘Other Income’ and accounting standard applied, and opinion from Tyke’s legal team.
iv) Clarification on CSOP settlement and payment & exit to subscribers;
v) whether CSOP is in form of SARs and how Company’s CSOPs are different from other CSOPs on the Tyke platform
vi) Details of events and banking transaction modes, and payment made to Tyke.
May 29, 2023 – The Company filed its 2nd response to SCN, as per requirements of AO directed during the hearing providing following details:
i) Copies of 5 agreements submitted and clarification given that contractual business relation entered into with 565 subscribers on Tyke platform, and all agreements had similar contents (2nd version of agreement, materially different from 1st version submitted as draft).
ii) Subscription money received was for ancillary activity and not main business and intention of CSOP is to collaborate with subscribers for future growth and brand loyalty, hence treated as ‘other income’.
iii) One-pager unsigned legal opinion of Tyke’s team which did not clearly indicate the specific accounting standard and thus the accounting treatment was not properly explained
iv) Company denied the CSOPs were in the nature of SARs.
v) Company provided timelines and details of payment received for subscription fees from Subscribers, through Tyke platform. The Company had in its 2nd Response to SCN also categorically mentioned that all 565 agreements were signed.
July 07, 2023 – Email sent to Company seeking clarifications regarding inconsistencies in agreement copies submitted on 12 May 2023 and 29 May 2023, and regarding SARs
Because the Company had submitted different versions of the Agreement, and different facts with no clarity, the AO even had to invite some of the subscribers to provide their views and documents regarding the offer from the Company.
July 25, 2023 – The Company clarified that initially on 12 May 2023, draft versions were submitted, and later on 29 May 2023 signed versions of the agreements were submitted as per direction of the AO.
Stance regarding SAR’s remained the same, that the CSOPs were not in the form of SARs, however, the Company submitted that not all agreements were signed with all subscribers.
At this point it is also important to note that the Company informed the AO that out of total 565 agreements, 114 agreements were still unsigned and had to be finalised (i.e. pending since February 2022).
July 31, 2023 – Another reply sent by company via email, with a copy of digitally signed agreement with one of the subscribers (3rd version of agreement which matched with agreement copy received form one of the subscribers directly. It is pertinent to note that the 3rd version was, once again materially different from earlier two versions).
August 21, 2023 – 2nd hearing before AO, wherein following submissions were made:
a. Company was a zero-revenue company in FY 2021-22
b. Company has duly paid GST
c. The CSOP agreement was entered into with subscribers to grow customer base and rewards would be in the form of discount/ concessions on the products of the Company amount received was treated as subscription / membership fees. d. CSOP was not a Derivative, and relied on a couple of judgments in support
e. Director being unaware of communication sent to subscribers by TYKE on behalf of the Company, regarding SARs and addendum to primary agreement
Additionally, Auditor submitted that he had received Management Representation Letter from the company wherein it was mentioned that management was yet to finalize the contracts and thus sample invoices.
September 22, 2023 – Order passed by AO, imposing total penalty of INR 10,00,000/- on the Company and on the 3 directors for breach of various provisions of section 42 of CA 2013 and asked Company to refund the total money received – INR 61,86,000/- along with interest of INR 7,17,576/- to subscribers respectively
Note: Text marked in bold depicts discrepancies identified by MCA
Annexure 1 – Extract from CA 2013 and Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956
Extract from CA 2013:
Section 2: Definitions
“(81) “securities” means the securities as defined in clause (h) of section 286-87 of the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956 (42 of 1956);”
Section 42: Issue of shares on private placement basis
42. (1) A company may, subject to the provisions of this section, make a private placement of securities.
(2) A private placement shall be made only to a select group of persons who have been identified by the Board (herein referred to as “identified persons”), whose number shall not exceed fifty or such higher number as may be prescribed6 [excluding the qualified institutional buyers and employees of the company being offered securities under a scheme of employees stock option in terms of provisions of clause (b) of sub-section (1) of section 62], in a financial year subject to such conditions as may be prescribed6.
(3) A company making private placement shall issue private placement offer and application in such form and manner as may be prescribed to identified persons, whose names and addresses are recorded by the company in such manner as may be prescribed:
Provided that the private placement offer and application shall not carry any right of renunciation.
Explanation I.—”Private placement” means any offer or invitation to subscribe or issue of securities to a select group of persons by a company (other than by way of public offer) through private placement offer-cum-application, which satisfies the conditions specified in this section.
Explanation II.—”Qualified institutional buyer”7 means the qualified institutional buyer as defined in the Securities and Exchange Board of India (Issue of Capital and Disclosure Requirements) Regulations, 2009, as amended from time to time, made under the Securities and Exchange Board of India Act, 1992 (15 of 1992).
Explanation III.—If a company, listed or unlisted, makes an offer to allot or invites subscription, or allots, or enters into an agreement to allot, securities to more than the prescribed6 number of persons, whether the payment for the securities has been received or not or whether the company intends to list its securities or not on any recognised stock exchange in or outside India, the same shall be deemed to be an offer to the public and shall accordingly be governed by the provisions of Part I of this Chapter.
(4) Every identified person willing to subscribe to the private placement issue shall apply in the private placement and application issued to such person alongwith subscription money paid either by cheque or demand draft or other banking channel and not by cash:Provided that a company shall not utilise monies raised through private placement unless allotment is made and the return of allotment is filed with the Registrar in accordance with sub-section (8).
(5) No fresh offer or invitation under this section shall be made unless the allotments with respect to any offer or invitation made earlier have been completed or that offer or invitation has been withdrawn or abandoned by the company:
Provided that, subject to the maximum number of identified persons under sub-section (2), a company may, at any time, make more than one issue of securities to such class of identified persons as may be prescribed.
(6) A company making an offer or invitation under this section shall allot its securities within sixty days from the date of receipt of the application money for such securities and if the company is not able to allot the securities within that period, it shall repay the application money to the subscribers within fifteen days from the expiry of sixty days and if the company fails to repay the application money within the aforesaid period, it shall be liable to repay that money with interest at the rate of twelve per cent per annum from the expiry of the sixtieth day:
Provided that monies received on application under this section shall be kept in a separate bank account in a scheduled bank and shall not be utilised for any purpose other than—
(a) for adjustment against allotment of securities; or
(b) for the repayment of monies where the company is unable to allot securities
(7) No company issuing securities under this section shall release any public advertisements or utilise any media, marketing or distribution channels or agents to inform the public at large about such an issue.
(8) A company making any allotment of securities under this section, shall file with the Registrar a return of allotment within fifteen days from the date of the allotment in such manner as may be prescribed8, including a complete list of all allottees, with their full names, addresses, number of securities allotted and such other relevant information as may be prescribed8.
(9) If a company defaults in filing the return of allotment within the period prescribed under sub-section (8), the company, its promoters and directors shall be liable to a penalty for each default of one thousand rupees for each day during which such default continues but not exceeding twenty-five lakh rupees.
(10) Subject to sub-section (11), if a company makes an offer or accepts monies in contravention of this section, the company, its promoters and directors shall be liable for a penalty which may extend to the amount raised through the private placement or two crore rupees, whichever is lower, and the company shall also refund all monies with interest as specified in sub-section (6) to subscribers within a period of thirty days of the order imposing the penalty.
(11) Notwithstanding anything contained in sub-section (9) and sub-section (10), any private placement issue not made in compliance of the provisions of sub-section (2) shall be deemed to be a public offer and all the provisions of this Act and the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956 (42 of 1956) and the Securities and Exchange Board of India Act, 1992 (15 of 1992) shall be applicable.
Extract from Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956
“(ac) “derivative” includes—
(A) a security derived from a debt instrument, share, loan, whether secured or unsecured, risk instrument or contract for differences or any other form of security;
(B) a contract which derives its value from the prices, or index of prices, of underlying securities;”
“(h) “securities” include—
(i) shares, scrips, stocks, bonds, debentures, debenture stock or other marketable securities of a like nature in or of any incorporated company or other body corporate;
(ia) derivative;
(ib) units or any other instrument issued by any collective investment scheme to the investors in such schemes;
(ic)security receipt as defined in clause (zg) of section 2 of the Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest Act, 2002;
(id) units or any other such instrument issued to the investors under any mutual fund scheme;
(ii) Government securities;
(iia) such other instruments as may be declared by the Central Government to be securities; and
(iii) rights or interest in securities;”
Annexure 2 – Applicability of IndAS
There are mainly four phases of applicability of IndAS. These phases are applicable on the basis of the net worth and the listing status of the company. These phases are divided by the MCA (Ministry of Corporate Affairs).
Phase I
Mandatory applicability to all companies from April 01, 2016, provided: •It is a listed or unlisted company •Its Net worth is greater than or equal to INR 500 crore in previous three Financial Years
Phase II
Mandatory applicability to all companies from April 01, 2017, provided: •It is a listed company or is in the process of being listed (as on 31 March 2016) •Its Net worth is greater than or equal to INR 250 crore but less than INR 500 crore in any of the previous four Financial Years
Phase III
Mandatory applicability to all Banks, NBFCs (including core investment companies, stock brokers, venture capitalists, etc) and Insurance companies from April 01, 2018, whose: •Net worth is more than or equal to INR 500 crore with effect from April 01, 2018 in previous three financial years
Phase IV
All NBFCs whose Net worth is more than or equal to INR 250 crore but less than INR 500 crore shall have IndAS mandatorily applicable to them with effect from April 01, 2019.
Notes:
1. If IndAS becomes applicable to any company, then it shall automatically be made applicable to all the subsidiaries, holding companies, associated companies, and joint ventures of that company, irrespective of individual qualification of such companies.
2. Companies can voluntarily choose to incorporate IndAS in their reports for accounting periods beginning on or after April 01, 2015.
3. Once a company has started reporting as per the IndAS, it cannot change to reporting as per previous laws.
Annexure 3 – Extract of financial statements of the Company
Emphasis of Matter
We draw attention to Note 20 and Note23 of the financial statements, wherein, the company has adopted and approved the Community Stock Option Plan (“CSOP Plan”) for granting to eligible community members identified and approved by the Board, the right to receive Payouts pursuant to the Plan. Each CSOP Holder is an evangelist of the Company’s products & services and accordingly the Company has agreed to reward the CSOP Holder through payouts. The Company issued 6,186 Community Stock Options as per the Company Stock Option Plan to 565 subscribers. The Company issued the CSOP per unit for subscription fee of Rs.1,000/- inclusive of applicable taxes and GST. The total amount received from such subscriptions have been recognised as Other income. The Company has agreed to reward the holders based on the future valuation of the Company and the reward may change over a period. Thus, the Company has created a provision for ‘CSOP Liability’ and the expense has been recognised as ‘CSOP Expenditure’ of Rs.52,42,373/-
Long Term Provisions
Particulars
As at 31.03.2022
As at 31.03.2021
(b) Provision – Others
Provisions for CSOP Liability
52,42,373
–
Total
52,42,373
–
Other Income
Particulars
For the year ended 31.03.2022
For the year ended 31.03.2021
CSOP Subscription*
52,42,373
–
Interest on Bank Deposit
13,268
–
Profit from Sale of Mutual Fund Units
19,766
–
Total
52,75,407
–
Note:
During the year, the Company has adopted and approved the Community Stock Option Plan (“CSOP Plan”) for granting to eligible community members identified and approved by the Board, the right to receive Payouts pursuant to the Plan. Each CSOP Holder is an evangelist of the Company’s products and services and accordingly the Company has agreed to reward the CSOP Holder through payouts. The Company issued 6,186 Community Stock Options as per the Company Stock Option Plan to 565 subscribers. The Company issued the CSOPs for a subscription fee of Rs. 1,000/- inclusive of applicable taxes and GST. The total amount received from such subscriptions has been recognised as Other Income. The Company has agreed to reward the holders based on the future valuation of the Company and the reward may increase/decrease over a period. Thus, the Company has created a provision for ‘CSOP Liability’ and the expense has been recognised as ‘CSOP Expenditure’ of Rs. 52,42,373/-. Basis recommendation issued by the legal team hosted on the Tyke platform.
The Central Board of Direct Taxes (CBDT) notified amendments to Rule 11UA of the Income-tax Rules, 1962 applicable for computing angel tax on September 25, 2023 pursuant to the draft rules introduced earlier and feedback received from stakeholders and general public.
In addition to the proposed changes, the CBDT has introduced rules for valuation for Compulsorily Convertible Preference Shares (CCPS).
Timeline
May 19, 2023 – CBDT proposes changes to Angel tax rules and notify list of excluded non-resident entities
May 24, 2023 – The Central Government notifies entities to whom Angel tax provisions will not apply
September 25, 2023 – The CBDT notifies amendments to Rule 11UA
New Valuation methods
In addition to the existing valuation methods [i.e., Book / Net Asset Value (NAV) and Discounted Cash Flow (DCF)] the CBDT has introduced the below options:
•Price offered to Venture Capital (VC): A VC undertaking can consider the investment valuation received for the issuance of unquoted equity shares from either a VC fund, a VC company, or a specified fund (Cat I / II AIF) as a valuation benchmark for determining FMV of equity shares issued as long as it does not exceed the aggregate investment so received. Consideration from other investor should be received within a period of 90 days before or after the date of issue of shares which are the subject matter of valuation
•Price offered to notified entities: The valuation of investment received by a company from notified entities can also be considered subject to conditions mentioned above
•International pricing methods: For investment by non-residents, they have an additional option to determine FMV by a Merchant Banker as per any of the below 5 methods:
(i) Comparable Company Multiple Method
(ii) Probability Weighted Expected Return Method
(iii) Option Pricing Method
(iv) Milestone Analysis Method
(v) Replacement Cost Method
Applicability of valuation methods
Method
Report issued by
Investment received from Resident
Investment received from Non-resident
Equity shares
CCPS
NAV²
Not specified
Yes
Yes
DCF²
Merchant Banker³
Yes
Yes
Price offered to venture capital
–
Yes
Yes
International pricing methods²
Merchant Banker³
–
–
Price offered to notified entities
–
Yes
Yes
1 CCPS can also be valued as per valuation of equity shares determined in line with the above methods as applicable
2 Safe Harbour available i.e. 10% upside variation is allowed
3 Date of merchant banker report not older than 90 days from date of issue of shares can be considered as valuation date
Do reach out to us at support@treelife.in if you need further help in understanding this or obtaining valuation reports
The following article offers an understanding of the funds received and disbursed by involved parties in a settlement outside the courtroom. It also outlines how such funds are handled according to the Income Tax Act and GST Act.
1.Treatment as per Income tax in the hands of a recipient
2.Treatment as per Income tax in the hands of the settling party
3.Understanding GST applicability on the same
4.Case laws
5.Conclusion
Treatment as per Income tax in the hands of a recipient
In the realm of taxation concerning out-of-court settlements, a pivotal aspect to consider is the categorization of receipts into revenue and capital under the Income Tax Act, 1961 (“IT Act”). This distinction helps identify whether the settlement amount is taxable or not.
Revenue receipts
Arise from the regular and routine business operations of an entity and are generally recurring in nature.
In out of court settlement, compensation for loss of trading stock or loss of profits can be considered as Revenue receipts.
Generally, revenue receipts are taxable unless specifically exempted.
Examples – amounts received for sale of goods, interest on loans, rental income.
Capital Receipts
Do not arise from the normal business operations and usually one-time receipts and are not recurrent.
In out of court settlement, compensation for damages leading to the diminution of the asset’s value or for the termination of a business can be considered as Capital Receipts.
Generally not taxable, unless it’s mentioned otherwise under the IT Act
Examples – Receipts include sale proceeds from selling an asset, money received from a share issue.
Distinguishing between compensatory and punitive nature is crucial for determining if compensation payments can be treated as allowable expenses. The following points outline this differentiation clearly.
Compensatory Expense
Paid damages or losses in business operations are compensatory expenses.
Paid to end a lawsuit for alleged damages or harm caused or payments to businesses for losses incurred due to contract breaches are compensatory expenses.
Examples include Payment for breach of contract or business losses.
Penal Expense
Paof toward fines or penalties levied for legal or regulatory violations are penal expenses.
In out of court settlement context, amounts paid to end a lawsuit for regulatory violations or payments for statutory non-compliances are penal in nature.
Common examples include fines for legal infringements or regulatory non-compliances
Untangling GST Applicability in Out-of-Court Settlements
The taxable event in GST is supply of goods or services or both. Hence its important to understand the meaning and scope of “Supply” under GST which clearly defined in the following 6 parameter
1. Supply of goods or services. Supply of anything other than goods or services does not attract GST
2. Supply should be made for a consideration
3. Supply should be made in the course or furtherance of business
4. Supply should be made by a taxable person
5. Supply should be a taxable supply
6. Supply should be made within the taxable territory
Compensation paid in out of court settlements does not qualify as a ‘supply’ under the GST regime. Therefore, it is not liable to GST. However, it’s vital to analyze the nature and purpose of the compensation to ascertain the exact GST implications.
Taxability of compensation paid under GST depends on whether the compensation is for
breach of contract – be considered as consideration for supply of a service and would be taxable under GST
for any other reason – it would not be taxable under GST as they cannot be treated as any sort of service and they lack the element of mutual consideration
For damages / liquidated damages – may be considered as supply of goods or services considering such receipt fall within the ambit of ‘agreeing to obligation to refrain from an act, or to tolerate an act or a situation, or to do an act’.
GST is not payable on damages/compensation paid for a legal injury as payment lacking the element of mutuality of consideration.
Conclusion
•Classification of receipts, whether revenue or capital, especially in the context of out-of-court settlements, might require a detailed analysis of the nature and purpose of the receipt.
•Decisions from judiciary and expert advice can aid in providing clarity.
•In practice, nature of receipt shall be determined by extensive scrutiny of pleadings in suit and / or recitals contained in the settlement agreement and careful drafting will be quintessential.
Often founders are confused about creating an ESOP pool on the cap table when investors require them to create one before making the investment.
An ESOP pool is a set of shares earmarked for the company’s employees – which will be issued to them under ESOP Scheme.
Creation of ESOP pool leads to dilution of founder and investor shareholding at the time of creation of the pool.
The shares forming part of the pool are not issued yet. They are just notionally carved out shares which are represented on the fully diluted cap table of the company.
Sample cap table on a fully diluted basis :
Shareholder
Pre-ESOP
On creation of ESOP pool
# of shares
% shareholding
Founder 1
5,000
50%
Founder 2
5,000
50%
ESOP Pool*
–
–
Total
10,000
100%
These are just notional shares and not issued to any employee benefit trust*
We have also created a sample cap table with an ESOP pool for your ready reference: Click to know more https://bit.ly/3pYF4zH
Practical Insights
Founders typically create an ESOP pool of 10-15%. As the company grows and raises rounds of funding, the ESOP pool dilutes to approx. 3-4%
Mature investors usually ask founders to create an ESOP pool before making investment so that their stake does not dilute during later stages of funding
Creation of an ESOP pool only requires passing of a simple board resolution.
In today’s globalized era, the world feels more interconnected than ever. Many companies are expanding internationally, setting up offices worldwide, and seeking new markets for their products. Some startups, including some unicorns, have relocated their holding company outside India in a process known as “flipping” to capitalize on global opportunities.
Understanding the Flipping Phenomenon
Flipping, in the Indian startup realm, refers to the practice where startups, originally based in India, restructure their corporate structure to relocate their holding company and intellectual property (IP) to foreign jurisdictions, usually the United States or Singapore despite having a majority of their market, personnel and founders in India.
The primary reasons for startups to externalize their corporate structure inter-alia are access to deeper pools of venture capital, favorable tax framework, market penetration and brand positioning as an international entity, which can be beneficial in terms of attracting global talent and customers.
However, recent times have seen an emergence of an interesting counter-trend: ‘Reverse Flipping’ or ‘De-externalization’.
However, recent times have witnessed an intriguing counter-trend: ‘Reverse Flipping’ or ‘De-externalization’ i.e. Indian startups are opting to reverse flip back into India due to its favorable economic policies, burgeoning domestic market, and growing investor confidence in the country’s startup ecosystem.
The Emergence of Reverse Flipping
Reverse flipping, as the name suggests, is the antithesis of the flipping trend. Here, startups that once relocated their holding companies outside India are now considering a strategic move back to their home ground, India.
As mentioned above, one of the primary reasons for reverse flipping back to India is the fact that the Indian startup ecosystem has matured significantly in recent years. There is now a large pool of untapped domestic retail investors who want to invest in emerging companies they believe have the potential to grow. Additionally, the Indian government is taking steps to make it easier for startups to go public, which could make it more attractive for startups to reverse flip.
Take, for example, PhonePe. Originally an Indian entity, it flipped its structure to Singapore but has now moved its base back to India. In doing so, the founders have gone on record to say that the investors had to pay almost INR 8,000 crore of taxes to the Indian Government. It also stands to lose the chance to offset its accumulated losses of almost INR 7,000 crore against future profits due to this restructuring. Also, all employees had to be migrated to a new India-level ESOP plan which stipulates a minimum 1 year cliff thereby resetting the vesting status to zero with a 1 year cliff.
PhonePe is not alone. Several startups like Razorpay and Groww are also evaluating this shift, acknowledging the promise that the Indian market holds.
How to Reverse Flip?
Structuring a reverse flip is not easy and startups considering this reverse journey have to navigate a maze of regulations. Some popular methods include share swaps, mergers, etc and could also require approval from NCLT.
Startups need to be aware of the potential tax and exchange control implications that come with such a restructuring exercise.
When a startup’s valuation has increased significantly since its initial flip, there can be significant tax consequences upon reverse flipping. The process can be perceived as a ‘transfer of assets’, leading to capital gains tax implications in India and possibly even in foreign jurisdictions. This can also technically lead to a change in beneficial ownership, thereby risking the accumulated losses for setoff against future profits. Startups also need to navigate the exchange control regulations when repatriating funds or assets to India, ensuring all compliances are met.
While the above provides a birds-eye view, it’s imperative for startups to consult experts for a tailor-made approach, aligning with their unique business needs and ensuring compliance with the tax and regulatory framework.
What is the Government saying?
Indian Economic Survey 2022-23 acknowledged the concept of reverse flipping and has listed possible measures that can accelerate the reverse flipping process for startups including simplifying the process for granting tax holidays to start-ups, simplification of taxation of ESOPs, simplifying multiple layers of tax and uncertainty due to tax litigation, simplifying procedures for capital flows, etc.
The International Financial Services Centres Authority i.e. IFSCA has also constituted an expert committee to formulate a roadmap to ‘Onshore the Indian innovation to GIFT IFSC’. IFSCA plans to make GIFT City, India’s first IFSC, the preferred location for startups to reverse flip into. This expert committee submitted its report1 on 25 August 2023 with recommended measures to be undertaken by various stakeholders such as ministries and regulatory bodies in implementing the idea of onshoring the Indian innovation to GIFT IFSC.
In Conclusion
The trend of reverse flipping underscores the belief in India’s potential as a global startup hub. While challenges exist, the long-term benefits of tapping into the domestic market, coupled with the strengthening startup ecosystem, are compelling many to look homeward. It will be intriguing to witness how this trend evolves and shapes the future.
Looking for expert contract advice? Call us at +91 99301 56000 today.
1. Play Games24x7 Private Limited v. Reserve Bank of India & Anr.
Factual Matrix
Play Games24x7 Private Limited (“Petitioner”) is engaged in the business of designing and developing software related to games of skill (“Business”), and offers the games ‘Ultimate Teen Patti’ and ‘Call it Right’ (“Impugned Games”). However, these Impugned Games do not involve any real-money winnings or cash prizes as rewards.
During the period 2006-2012, the Petitioner received several foreign remittances, for which the necessary reporting with the Reserve Bank of India (“RBI”) under the Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 and the rules made thereunder (“FEMA”) was pending from the Petitioner’s end. In 2012, the RBI, directed the Petitioner to file an application such that all the FEMA contraventions could be compounded together (“Compounding Application”).
In early 2013, the foreign exchange department of the RBI returned directed the Petitioner to approach the then Department of Industrial Policy and Promotion (now the Department from Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade (“DPIIT”)), to seek a clarification whether the Petitioner was eligible to legally receive FDI (“DPIIT Clarification”), which the Petitioner had applied for, but to no avail.
Thereafter, in March 2020, the Petitioner filed yet another Compounding Application with the RBI, which the RBI returned to Petitioner, citing that the DPIIT Clarification was still not obtained by the Petitioner.
Despite multiple communications with the RBI, there was no tangible outcome with regards to the DPIIT Clarification. In light of the same, in May 2021, the Petitioner filed the present petition against the RBI before the Hon’ble Bombay High Court alleging that the Compounding Application was being unreasonably delayed by the RBI.
Contentions and the question in point
Party
Contentions
Petitioner
The Impugned Games were casual/ social games which did not involve any real-money winnings or cash prizes as rewards. The Petitioner earned revenue through the Impugned Games only through in-app purchases by players and through in-game advertisements. Since the Impugned Games, although ‘games of skill’, did not have any real-money winnings or rewards, they could not be construed as ‘gambling’ under gaming laws in India.
RBI
It was not concerned with the assessment of the Petitioner’s nature of Business and that it just required for its records, the DPIIT to state that the Petitioner’s Business was not illegal in nature. If the DPIIT Clarification would identify the Petitioner’s Business as permissible, the Compounding Application would be processed by the RBI.
DPIIT
The Impugned Games, being ‘games of chance’ under Indian laws, fell under the purview of ‘gambling’, which is a prohibited sector under the FDI Policy 2020 (“FDI Policy”).
Question in point before the Hon’ble Bombay High Court
Whether the Petitioner’s Business would constitute ‘gambling’ (which is a prohibited sector under the FDI Policy) and thus, disqualify the Petitioner from being entitled to FDI.
Judgement and Key Takeaways
JUDGEMENT
The Hon’ble Bombay High Court primarily placed reliance on the Hon’ble Supreme Court of India’s decisions in RMD Chamarbaugwala v. Union of India (AIR 1957 SC 628) and Dr. K.R. Laxmanan v. State of Tamil Nadu & Anr. [1996 (2) SCC 226] in order to determine the legality of the Petitioner’s Business and whether the same constitutes ‘gambling’.
The Hon’ble Bombay High Court held that in order to be construed as ‘gambling’, the game shall: (i) predominantly be a ‘game of chance; and (ii) be played for a reward. Since there was no real-money reward involved, the Impugned Games could not be brought under the purview of ‘gambling’.
The Hon’ble Bombay High Court also directed the RBI consider the Petitioner’s Compounding Application in an expedited manner.
KEY TAKEAWAYS
FDI in entities offering games with no real-money rewards is legal and shall not be prohibited under the FDI Policy.
For an online game to be considered ‘gambling’, it shall: (i) predominantly be a ‘game of chance’; and (ii) be played for a real-money reward.
2. Gameskraft Technologies Private Limited v. Directorate General of Goods Services Tax Intelligence & Ors.
Factual Matrix
Gameskraft Technologies Private Limited (“Petitioner”) is a company engaged in developing skill-based online games such as ‘Rummyculture’.
In November 2021, the GST authorities (“Respondents”) having conducted search and seizure operations at the Petitioner’s premises, alleged that the Petitioner had suppressed taxable amounts and passed certain orders (“Attachment Orders”) attaching the Petitioner’s bank accounts (“Attached Accounts”), to which the Petitioner filed several objections in the Hon’ble High Court of Karnataka, but to no avail.
In December 2021, the Petitioner challenged the Respondent’s orders attaching the Attached Accounts pursuant to which, the Hon’ble High Court of Karnataka issued an order, allowing the Petitioner to operate the Attached Accounts for limited purposes.
In August 2022, the Hon’ble High Court of Karnataka directed that no further action be initiated against the Petitioner by the Respondents. However, soon thereafter, in September 2022, the Respondents issued an intimation notice to the Petitioner under the applicable GST provisions, demanding that the Petitioner deposit a sum of approximately INR 21,000 crores along with applicable interest and penalty (“Intimation Notice”).
Thereafter, in March 2020, the Petitioner filed yet another Compounding Application with the RBI, which the RBI returned to Petitioner, citing that the DPIIT Clarification was still not obtained by the Petitioner.
Despite multiple communications with the RBI, there was no tangible outcome with regards to the DPIIT Clarification. In light of the same, in May 2021, the Petitioner filed the present petition against the RBI before the Hon’ble Bombay High Court alleging that the Compounding Application was being unreasonably delayed by the RBI.
Contentions and the question in point
Party
Contentions
Petitioner
– The Petitioner merely hosts the ‘rummy’ game and the discretion to play a game and the stake for which it is to be played lies entirely with the players. The Petitioner merely charges 10% of the players’ winnings as ‘platform fees’. – The Respondents’ contentions under the Impugned Notice were completely false, perverse, malicious and deserved to be disregarded on the following grounds: the game ‘rummy’ is a ‘game of skill’ as per well-established judgements of the Hon’ble Supreme Court of India and thus, the Petitioner cannot be said to have been engaged in betting/ gambling. – The Respondents had maliciously inflated the ‘buy-in’ amounts for the ‘rummy’ game and had shown the same as revenue derived by the Petitioner, whereby in reality, the ‘buy-in’ amount is not the Petitioner’s property and the same is reimbursed to the winner by the Petitioner, once the game is over. – The Terms & Conditions mentioned on the Petitioner’s portal, which were not referred to by the Petitioner, clearly mention that the monies deposited by the players are held in ‘trust’ by the Petitioner and that the same completely negated the Respondent’s contention that the entire ‘buy-in’ amount was the Petitioner’s income.
Respondents
– The Petitioner’s provision of the platform, which allows users to play online ‘rummy’ and from which the Petitioner derives profits and gains, amounts to ‘betting and gambling’ under the CGST Act, since rummy is a ‘game of chance’. – The Petitioner’s contention that it charged 10% of the stakes placed by users as ‘platform fees’ was not acceptable, as the same shall be only collected in order to meet expenses and shall not be in the nature of commission. – In light of the above points, the Petitioner’s contention that ‘rummy’ is a ‘game of skill’ shall be rejected.
Question in point before the Hon’ble High Court of Karnataka
Whether games such as ‘rummy’, being predominantly ‘games of skill’, would tantamount to ‘gambling or betting’ as contemplated under the CGST Act.
Judgement and Key Takeaways
JUDGEMENT
The Hon’ble High Court of Karnataka held that ‘rummy’ would predominantly be a ‘game of skill’ and not a ‘game of chance’.
A ‘game of skill’ whether played with or without stakes would not amount to ‘gambling’.
The meaning of the terms “lottery, betting and gambling” under the CGST Act shall not include games of skill, and thus the same shall not apply to ‘rummy’, whether played with or without stakes. In light of the same, the game ‘rummy’ on the Petitioner’s platform, shall not be taxable as “betting and gambling” as contended by the Respondents under the Impugned Notice.
The Hon’ble High Court of Karnataka, finding the Impugned Notice illegal, arbitrary and without jurisdiction or authority of law, passed orders to quash the same.
KEY TAKEAWAYS
A game of skill whether played with or without stakes and whether played online/ offline does not amount to gambling. Thus, ‘rummy’, predominantly being a ‘game of skill’, whether played with or without stakes and whether played offline/ online, is not gambling.
A game of chance and played with stakes, is gambling.
A game of mixed chance and skill is not gambling, if it is predominantly a game of skill and not of chance.
A game of mixed chance and skill is gambling, if it is predominantly a game of chance and not of skill.
A Liquidation Preference provision sets out the level of priority that an investors’ shares receive for the purpose of recovering their initial investment (or a multiple thereof) upon trigger of a liquidation event. A liquidation event typically includes winding up, sale of substantial assets of a company, change of control, merger, acquisition, reorganization and other corporate transactions, among others.
How Liquidation Preference Helps an Investor?
1
Recovery of Initial
A liquidation preference allows the investors to recover at least their initial investment in a company.
2
Multiple on the Initial Investment
A liquidation preference provision also allows the investors to earn a multiple on their initial investment, i.e., instead of 1x, investors may seek 2x or more, if so agreed.
3
Distribution in order of seniority
A liquidation preference clause allows the distribution of the proceeds to be in an order of priority on the basis of the series of securities held by the investors.
.
Types and Mechanics of Liquidation Preference
Types of Liquidation Preference
Type of LP
Particulars
Non-participating Liquidation Preference
1x
Allows the investors to recover only their initial investment in the company.
1x or pro-rata, whichever is higher*(single dip)
Allows the investors to recover their initial investment or entitles them to the proceeds from the liquidation event, basis their pro-rata shareholding in the company (on an as-if converted basis), whichever is higher.
Participating Liquidation Preference
1x(double-dip)
Allows the investor to recover their initial investment (or a multiple thereof) in addition to a right to participate in the remaining proceeds basis their pro-rata shareholding in the company.
*Note:The multiple on the liquidation preference may be more than 1x and the amount of distribution of the liquidation preference shall be determined basis such a multiple.
Let us understand the mechanism of different types of liquidation preference through the below illustration:
*Note: The total liquidation proceeds are the total proceeds from a liquidation event which are subject to distribution between the shareholders.
2x or pro rata, whichever is higher
Total Liquidation proceeds*
Investors’ liquidation entitlement (2x)
Investors’ liquidation entitlement (pro-rata)
Actual entitlement
INR 20cr
INR 20cr
INR 2cr
INR 20cr.
INR 400cr
INR 20cr
INR 40cr
INR 40cr.
.
This form of liquidation preference is most desirable as, while it allows the investors to recover their initial investment, it also enables them to take advantage of the upside in case the larger proceeds are accumulated from a liquidation event.
It is however, not recommend signing up for a multiple on the investment amount.
While this may seem like a desirable form of liquidation preference, in the event the structure of a liquidation is not pari passu, i.e., in case the liquidation clause provides for a seniority, this may lead to disadvantage to the holders of equity shares (in most cases, the founders).
Conclusion
In conclusion, while liquidation preference is a crucial right for the investors, it is important for the founders to be mindful about the construct of this provision.
Early stage founders are recommended to consider the 1x non-participating liquidation preference, preferably provided in Scenario 1. Excessive or stringent liquidation preferences can deter future investment rounds and put the founders at risk of reduced share in the liquidation proceeds.
“Reverse flip” or “re-domiciliation” refers to a corporate restructuring process in which a company changes its country of domicile or legal registration from one jurisdiction to another.
Background
PhonePe was incorporated in 2015 in India
In April 2016, PhonePe was acquired by Flipkart. As part of the acquisition, PhonePe flipped its structure to Singapore
In 2018, PhonePe became a part of Walmart after it acquired Flipkart
In October 2022, PhonePe announced that it has moved its domicile to India (reverse flip) for following key reasons:
PhonePe wants to focus on India markets for the next couple of decades. PhonePe is a digital payments company that operates primarily in India. By redomiciling to India, PhonePe can be more responsive to the needs of its customers and partners.
The Indian government has been tightening regulationsfor digital payments companies in recent years. By redomiciling to India, PhonePe can be more easily compliant with these regulations.
To be better positioned for an IPO. PhonePe is expected to go public in the next few years
What Happened?
Steps undertaken
PhonePe moved all businesses and subsidiaries of PhonePe Singapore to PhonePe India directly
PhonePe created a new ESOP plan at India level and migrated all group employees to this new plan
IndusOS, owned by PhonePe, also shifted operations from Singapore to PhonePe India
Key Consequences of Reverse Flip to India
Lapse of accumulated losses of USD 900 million
PhonePe stands to lose the chance to offset its USD 900 million (~INR 7,380 crore) of accumulated losses against future profits as shifting the domicile from Singapore to India is viewed as a restricting event under Section 79 of the Income Tax Act, 1961
As per the provisions of Section 79, a company is not allowed to carry forward the losses if the change in beneficial ownership of shareholding of more than 50% occurred at the end of year in which losses were incurred
Reset of ESOPs to zero vesting with 1 year cliff
All employees of PhonePe were migrated to the new India level ESOP plan which stipulates a minimum 1 year cliff.
Thus, the employees vesting status was reset to zero with a 1 year cliff
Tax payout by investors of almost INR 8,000 cr
PhonePe investors, led by Walmart, sold their stake in the Singapore entity and invested in PhonePe India
This means that there was a capital gains tax event in India for the the investors leading to a tax-pay-out of almost INR 8,000 cr
Other Startups looking at Reverse Flip
Razorpay is in process to move its parent entity from the US to India
Groww is planning to move its domicile from the US to India
Pepperfry has reverse flipped their structure to India via amalgamation
The Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023 (“Act”) is intended to safeguard and protect digital personal data, and (inter alia) govern the manner in which it can be collected, stored, processed, transferred, and erased. The Act imposes requirements on data fiduciaries/collectors and data processors, as well as certain duties on the data subject/individual with respect to personal data.
“Personal Data” under the Act includes any digital or digitized data about an individual (including any data which can be used to identify an individual). This excludes any non-digital data, or any data which cannot be used to identify an individual in any manner (including in concert with any other data).
This document is intended to provide a summary of the obligations of B2B-based SaaS business, which arise from the Act.
An Overview
The key obligations of businesses towards complying with the Act include:
Identify the extent of Personal Data collection, storage and processing which your business undertakes, and how much is necessary.
Prepare notices for procuring consents from individuals whose Personal Data you collect, store, and process (including those individuals whose Personal Data has already been collected and/or is being stored or processed), specifying:
Type/s of Personal Data you will use;
The specific purpose/s you will use it for;
The manner in which they can withdraw consent or raise grievances; and
The manner in which they can make a complaint to the Data Protection Board of India.
Maintain a record of consents procured and provide the following rights:
Right to request for (i) summary of their Personal Data being used; and (ii) identities of parties to whom their Personal Data has been transferred;
Right to correct, update and/or delete Personal Data (unless required to be retained for compliance with law);
Right to redressal for grievances and complaints;
Right to nominate another individual to exercise their rights (in the event of death or incapacity)
Action Items
While B2B SaaS platforms have limited Personal Data collection, Personal Data can still be collected and processed in case of user accounts for individuals/employees/representatives of enterprise customers. Businesses can take the following actions towards compliance with the Act:
Data audit: Carry out an internal data audit, including identifying Personal Data collection, storage and processing requirements;
Limit Personal Data usage: Erase or anonymize Personal Data to the extent feasible to reduce the compliance and associated risks, or limit the Personal Data points which are collected;
Update your product to enable privacy rights: Businesses should therefore make available on the SaaS tool / platform functionalities to:
Issue notices for procuring consent for Personal Data collection, storage and processing prior to any such collection, storage or processing. These notices can be worded in simple and clear terms so as to enable individuals to know their rights, and should include language which clearly states that consent is provided for collection, storage, and processing (including processing by third-parties); specify the purpose/s for the type or types of processing. For example – in case the processing will be done for purposes A, B and C, consent will have to procured specific for each of A, B and C; mention that consent can be withdrawn
Request modification, correction, updating, or erasure of Personal Data. Other than any Personal Data which is necessary for providing the services (for example, corporate email IDs), all Personal Data should be subject to modification or erasure pursuant to withdrawal of consent.
Appoint person/s who can handle complaints, grievances, or requests from individuals. This can be an individual assigned specifically for this task or a team responsible for ensuring speedy response.
Implement technical measures to protect against and mitigate data breaches and their consequences. The Act requires fiduciaries/collectors to “take reasonable security safeguards to prevent personal data breach”, which can include cloud monitoring, penetration testing, ISO certification, etc., depending on the sensitivity and extent of Personal Data.
The Office of Principal Scientific Advisor to the Government of India published the Draft National Deep Tech Startup Policy (NDTSP) for public recommendations. According to Startup India’s database, as of May 2023, more than 10,000 startups in India can be classified within the deep tech space and it is imperative to address the complex problems in the ecosystem.
Deep tech Definition
Deep tech refers to technologies which are based on pioneering scientific breakthroughs, which help providing solutions to complex problems. Deep tech conceptually includes the segment of Artificial Intelligence, Big data and analytics, Robotics, Internet of Things, Blockchain, etc., however, it is seldom difficult to make that identification.
The NDTSP recognizes that in order to understand the issues in the ecosystem, it is important to focus on identifying what qualifies as ‘deep tech’. While doing so may be challenging, the NDTSP aims to establish a framework of a working group that would be responsible in identifying the techno-commercially viable startups, which would further enable the creation of a definitive criterion for determining whether a startup can be qualified as ‘deep tech’.
Objective of the NDTSP
The NDTSP seeks to address the needs, complex challenges and strengthen the deep tech startup ecosystem by complimenting the current Start-up India policies and initiatives. The NDTSP aims to thematically prioritize the areas that require intervention and propose policy level changes in order to create a conducive ecosystem for the deep tech startups in the following manner:
Nurturing Research, Development & Innovation
The NDTSP aims to bolster research, development and innovation by incentivizing researchers, facilitate seamless dissemination of knowledge and set up platforms for protection and commercialization of IP. The primary priority of the policy is to increase gross expenditure on research and development by encouraging public and private investment through patient capital.
Strengthening Intellectual Property Regime
The NDTSP recognizes that the deep tech ecosystem lacks specialized support in obtaining patents required for such cutting-edge technology. In order to streamline the process of obtaining IP registrations, the NDTSP focuses on building framework for obtaining and managing the IP specifically in the deep tech space, capacity building for patent landscaping, monetary incentive for developing technologies with the government and other amendments in the current IPR Policy, 2016.
Facilitating Access to Funding
The NDTSP aims to enhance the already existing policies and programs of the government in order to tailor them for the requirements of the deep tech space by various initiatives such as setting up a centralized window to capture the lifecycle of government grant payments, assessment of the current CSR laws in order to facilitate CSR funding into the deep tech sector, building a dedicated deep tech guidance fund with longer tenure to match the gestation period of the deep tech startups, to mobilise the government, private and foreign funding in the ecosystem, reducing the compliance burden and onerous taxation in order to curb the relocation of startups to other countries with better taxation regimes, among others.
Enabling Infrastructure Access and Resource Sharing
The NDTSP recognizes the high cost required for the primary R&D in the frontier technology space and hence, it endeavours to provide access to shared infrastructure to deep tech startups at nominal fees. The NDTSP also aims to build other resource sharing mechanisms for dissemination of data to such startups, as well as dissemination of data expertise.
Creating Conducive Regulations, Standards and Certifications
The NDTSP encourages establishment of mechanisms such as regulatory sandboxes that would help startups, end-users, industry, and regulatory experts to test the technology in a controlled environment while gathering evidence on functionality and potential risks of the technology. The NDTSP also focuses on providing subsidies and exemption in certification and accreditation costs for deep tech startups. This enables experimentation of frontier technology to comply with existing regulatory frameworks.
Attracting Human Resource & Initiate Capacity Building
The NDTSP places great impetus on capacity building vis-à-vis encourages establishment of knowledge dissemination mechanisms in different segments of frontier technology, creation of accessibility to the educational resources and building inclusive framework for encouraging involvement of women and people from tier II and tier III cities in augmenting the deep tech ecosystem.
Promoting Procurement & Adoption
The NDTSP advocates for public procurement as a market for deep tech startups and aims to enhance the current programs and initiatives by implementing targeted interventions. The NDTSP urges the government to take a higher risk on such deep tech startups and enable public procurement to be the first market for such startups.
Enhancing Policy & Program Interlinkages
While many policies to encourage the deep tech segment are already established, the NDTSP encourages enhancing the policies and creating interlinkages in already existing initiatives in order to create a larger impact.
Sustenance of Deep Tech Startups
Lastly, considering the gestation period of deep tech startups, the policy aims to set mechanisms and provide a roadmap to the startups engaged in building frontier technology to ensure sustainable growth by implementation of funding sensitization programs, facilitation of meaningful partnerships, among many other initiatives.
While the initiative of formulating a policy for the deep tech ecosystem is meritorious, it would be interesting to witness how the policy shapes up. Considering the nascent stage of the deep tech ecosystem in India and the multitudes of benefits that the deep tech actually offers, it is pertinent to encourage experimentation and high-risk investments in this ecosystem.
The Draft National Deep Tech Startup Policy is open for public recommendation until September 15, 2023.
WhatsApp has become a ubiquitous messaging platform, with millions of users worldwide relying on it for personal and professional communication. With the legal system having already embraced technology and digital transformation to streamline their processes and enhance accessibility and electronic filing systems, digital signatures, and online platforms for case management, it has now also started accepting WhatsApp as a tool to enhance client communication and flow of information. Courts in India have also started accepting service of documents sent through WhatsApp to be valid service in certain situations.
Here is an analysis of accepting WhatsApp as a valid platform for service:
Proof of Delivery
One of the primary requirements for accepting WhatsApp documents as valid court service is the ability to prove delivery. Traditionally, a clear paper trail was created through registered mail or in-person delivery to demonstrate that the documents were received by the intended recipient. With WhatsApp, the challenge lies in establishing irrefutable evidence of delivery.
Acknowledgment and Read Receipts
WhatsApp offers features like read receipts and acknowledgment indicators, which can serve as evidence of delivery and receipt of documents. When a recipient opens and reads a message, the sender can receive a read receipt, providing a timestamp as proof of delivery. Additionally, if the recipient acknowledges receiving the message or responds to it, it further strengthens the case for the validity of WhatsApp documents as court service.
Authentication and Integrity
Courts place a high value on document authenticity and integrity. When considering WhatsApp documents as valid court service, it becomes crucial to establish the authenticity of the sender and the integrity of the document. Verification mechanisms, such as digital signatures or encryption, can help ensure that the documents have not been tampered with and that they originate from the identified sender. Confidentiality of documents and service is another concern faced by courts, however, WhatsApp claims to incorporate end-to-end encryption.
Legal Framework and Precedents
Courts in India have explicitly started recognizing WhatsApp as a valid platform of communication and service of documents related to court proceedings. However, burden of proof of service lies entirely on the party claiming service to have been completed through WhatsApp.
Cost-Effective Solution
Adopting WhatsApp as a communication tool can be a cost-effective solution for legal service providers and helps reduce wastage of paper.
Instances where courts have accepted service done via WhatsApp to be valid
The Delhi High Court set a precedent in 2017 in Tata Sons Limited & Ors Vs John Does, by allowing service of summons through WhatsApp after the Defendants evaded service though regular modes.
Thereafter, in SBI Cards and Payments Services Pvt Ltd Versus Rohidas Jadhav, the Bombay High Court accepted the service of notice in an execution application after finding that the PDF file containing the notice had not only been served but the attachment had also been opened by the opposite party. Justice G.S. Patel observed that “For the purposes of service of Notice under Order XXI Rule 22, I will accept this. I do so because the icon indicators clearly show that not only was the message and its attachment delivered to the Respondent’s number but that both were opened.
Justice G.S. Patel at Bombay High Court in Kross Television India Pvt Ltd & Anr Vs. Vikhyat Chitra Production & Ors. has also held that the purpose of service is to put the other party to notice. Where an alternative mode (email and WhatsApp) is used and service is shown to be effected and acknowledged, it cannot be suggested that there was ‘no notice’.
The Rohini Civil Court at Delhi in a case has also accepted the blue double-tick sign in a WhatsApp message as valid proof that the message’s recipients had seen a case-related notice.
Conclusion
As the Supreme Court is yet to lay down a precedent or ruling accepting Whatsapp as valid medium of service. The acceptance of WhatsApp documents as valid court service is a complex issue that requires careful consideration of factors such as proof of delivery, acknowledgment, authentication, and adherence to legal frameworks. As the Indian courts continue to navigate the digital landscape and embrace technology, it is essential for legal professionals, lawmakers, and technology providers to work together to establish clear guidelines and standards that safeguard the integrity of court proceedings while embracing the efficiencies offered by modern communication platforms like WhatsApp. The courts incorporating WhatsApp as part of the legal service workflow demonstrates the industry’s commitment to adapting to the evolving needs of clients in an increasingly digital world.
A fast-track merger is a streamlined process for combining two or more companies. It is typically designed to expedite the merger process, reduce administrative burdens, and facilitate efficient integration of the merging entities. It involves simplifying certain procedural steps and regulatory approvals, allowing the merger to be completed quickly.
Eligibility Criteria
A scheme of merger or amalgamation under section 233 of the Companies Act, 2013 may be entered into between any of the following classes of companies, namely:-
A holding company and its wholly-owned subsidiary company or such other class or classes of companies;
Two or more start-up companies; or
One or more start-up companies with one or more small companies*.
*Small Company means a company whose paid up capital is maximum Rs 4 crore and turnover is maximum Rs 40 crore
Highlights of Recent Amendment
The Ministry of Corporate Affairs (“MCA”) made amendments to Rule 25 of the Companies (Compromises, Arrangements and Amalgamations) Rules, 2016, on 15th May, 2023 which states that the Central Government (CG) now has a specific timeframe to approve merger and amalgamation schemes, addressing the previous absence of a defined time frame for approval from the Registrar of Companies (“ROC”) or Official Liquidator (“OL”).
The purpose of these amendments is to streamline and expedite the merger and amalgamation process specifically for start-up companies and small companies under section 233 of the Companies Act, 2013.
Step Plan for a Fast-track Merger
Step 1: Authorization under Articles & Memorandum of Association
Step 2: Draft a scheme of merger (“Scheme”)
Step 3: Convene a Board Meeting approving the Scheme
Step 4: Declaration of solvency with the ROC
Step 5: Convening meetings of Shareholders & Creditors
Step 6: Filing a copy of Scheme with Regional Director (“RD”), ROC, OL for inviting objections
Step 7: No Objections from the authorities
Step 8: If found within public interest RD may approve the scheme
Step 9: File form INC 28 with ROC within 30 days of approval from RD
Amendments are as follows
Note: The Scheme in each of the aforementioned situations shall be approved or deemed to be approved only if the same is in the public interest or in the interest of the creditors
IF
THEN
No objection/ suggestion received by the CG from ROC/OL within 30 days of the receipt of copy of scheme.
CG shall confirm and approve the scheme within 15 days after the expiry of 30 days.
No confirmation from CG within 60 days from the receipt of the scheme.
The scheme shall be deemed to be approved.
On receipt of objections/ suggestions from ROC/ OL where such objection/ suggestion are not sustainable.
CG shall approve the scheme and issue confirmation order within 30 days after the expiry of 30 days.If no confirmation order is issued within the aforementioned period, it shall be deemed that it has no objection to the scheme and a confirmation order shall be issued accordingly.
On receipt of objections/ suggestions from ROC/ OL where CG is of opinion that the scheme is not in the public interest or in the interest of creditors.
CG shall file an application with the tribunal within 60 days of receipt of the scheme, requesting the tribunal to consider the scheme in the regular manner. If CG does not file the application within the aforesaid period, it shall be deemed that it has no objection to the scheme and a confirmation order shall be issued accordingly.
•Name to be available and unique. Should contain the nature of business •Minimum 2 names to be proposed
Share Capital
•Authorized and paid-up share capital to be determined •Sample capital structure: -10,000 equity shares of INR 10 per share -Total paid-up capital of INR 100,000 -Total authorized capital of INR 1,000,000
Directors
•Minimum 2 directors required •Minimum 1 director to mandatorily be Indian resident
Shareholders
•Minimum 2 shareholders required
Registered Office Address
•Commercial property/office location required as registered address •Services of co-working office spaces can also be availed for virtual office address
Incorporation process
Step 1 – Obtain DSC of directors & shareholders
Approx TAT: 2 Days Key documents/information required to be filed: Aadhar/PAN card, contact no. & email address and photo of individual
Step 2 – File for name application
Approx TAT: 3 Days Form: Spice+ Part-A Key documents/information required to be filed:
a. 2 proposed names of company b. NIC code along with 2-3 sentences about proposed business of company
Step 3 – File incorporation documents
Approx TAT: 1 Days Form: Spice+ Part-B Key documents/information required to be filed:
A. Shareholder and director details + KYC proofs
KYC documents of foreign director and shareholder need to beapostilled and notarized in home country
B. Company details – Share capital (authorized and paid up), registered office address, email address and contact no.
Note: TAT is subject to MCA website
On approval of spice forms, company incorporation is complete
Certificate of incorporation, PAN, and TAN are issued to the company
Company can open bank account
Post – incorporation process
STEP 1 – Post incorporation filings
A. FORM ADT 1 Approx TAT: 2 Days Key documents and information required to be filed:
– Auditor details – Name of auditor/auditor’s firm along with partner’s name, PAN, Membership no., registered address, email address, written consent & certificate stating he/she is not disqualified for appointment
– Company’s board resolution appointing such auditor B. FORM INC 20AApprox TAT: 2 Days Key documents/information required to be file: Bank statement of company showing inward receipt of subscription money from subscribers
Company can issue share certificates to its shareholders
STEP 2 – RBI filing in case of foreign investor
Form: FC-GPR Approx TAT: 2 Days* (*2 days from receipt of FIRC and KYC from AD bank) Key documents/information required to be filed: FIRC and KYC for the fund transfer in foreign exchange entity master registration and business user registration to be obtained on FIRMS portal
The Constitution of India explicitly prohibits discrimination based on sex, race, religion, or on any other ground, but it has taken some time for this protection to be extended to LGBTQ+ individuals. The landmark judgment in NALSA v. Union of India case in 2014 marked a progressive interpretation by the Supreme Court, which recognized that discrimination based on sexual orientation and gender identity falls within the ambit of “discrimination on the grounds of sex.” The court emphasized that such discrimination violates the fundamental right to equality enshrined in the Constitution.
In a subsequent case, Navtej Singh Johar v. Union of India, the Supreme Court took one step forward by acknowledging that the freedom to choose one’s sexual orientation and express one’s gender identity, including through dress, speech, and mannerisms, is at the core of an individual’s identity.
Although there is an absence of standalone anti-discrimination legislations in India, certain laws such as the Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act, 2016, the Equal Remuneration Act, 1976 (along with the Code on Wages, 2019), the Human Immunodeficiency Virus and Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome (Prevention and Control) Act, 2017, and the Transgender Persons (Protection of Rights) Act, 2019, do contain provisions addressing discrimination against individuals falling under the ambit of the aforementioned laws.
A major drawback of the Equal Remuneration Act, 1976 is that while it encourages pay parity at workplaces, however its scope is restricted to merely two genders, i.e., men and women thereby alienating an individual with a different sexual orientation from obtaining the benefits under this legislation.
This piece highlights the various workplace policies in India and the need to make them more inclusive for the disabled persons and those belonging to LGBTQ+ communities.
Equal Opportunity Policy under Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act, 2016
The Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act (“Act”) requires all establishments to have an equal opportunity policy (EOP) specifically for individuals with disabilities. This policy must be made publicly available, preferably on the establishment’s website or in conspicuous locations within the premises. The EOP should outline the facilities and services that will be provided to enable individuals with disabilities to fulfill their responsibilities effectively in the establishment.
Furthermore, if the organization employs 20 or more individuals, the EOP must include the following details:
A comprehensive list of positions within the establishment that are deemed suitable for individuals with disabilities;
The procedure for selecting individuals with disabilities for different positions, as well as providing post-recruitment and pre-promotion training, prioritizing them in transfers and job assignments, granting special leave, allocating residential accommodation if available, and offering other necessary facilities.
Provisions for assistive devices, ensuring barrier-free accessibility, and implementing other necessary measures to accommodate individuals with disabilities.
Information about the designated liaison officer. It is mandatory for every establishment with 20 or more employees to appoint a liaison officer responsible for overseeing the recruitment of individuals with disabilities and ensuring the provision of necessary facilities and amenities.
A copy of the EOP must be registered with the relevant authority (whether a Chief Commissioner or State Commissioner, as the case may be) specified by the law.
Can POSH Policy be Gender Neutral?
The Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace (Prevention, Prohibition and Redressal) Act, 2013 (“POSH Act”) is an Indian legislation designed to address workplace sexual harassment and ensure a safe working environment for women. Although the law primarily aims to protect women due to the widespread gender-based discrimination they face, it does not exclude or expressly/impliedly prohibit inclusion of men or individuals of other gender identities from receiving protection. It is important to recognize and address the experiences of all individuals who may encounter sexual harassment, regardless of their gender identity.
It is important to note that in the POSH Act, there is no bar on gender for the respondent, i.e., although the victim can only be a woman, but there is no specific gender mentioned for the respondent. Therefore, the term “respondent” encompasses all genders.
During the legislative process, the idea of enacting a gender-neutral law was discussed. However, this discussion primarily centered around men’s rights groups advocating for equal treatment and was framed as a debate between men and women. In response to this, the Parliamentary Standing Committee in 2011 proposed that the law should remain specific to one gender, citing the historical disadvantages, discrimination, abuse, and harassment faced by women. The committee based its recommendation on the belief that women are particularly vulnerable to workplace harassment, which hinders their ability to work. The primary objective of maintaining a gender-specific law was to increase female participation in the workforce and establish a robust mechanism to safeguard women’s employment rights.
In Anamika v Union of India, the Delhi High Court ruled that transgender individuals can utilize the protection under provisions related to sexual harassment, (which are commonly resorted to in cases of harassment by men against women), to file complaints. It is pertinent to note that in this case, although the aggrieved person was a transgender, however she identified herself as a woman and possessed a legally sanctioned identity document as evidence.
Provisions under Transgender Persons (Protection of Rights) Act, 2019
In 2014, the Supreme Court of India made a significant ruling in the case of National Legal Services Authority v. Union of India. This ruling played a crucial role in establishing the rights of transgender individuals in India. The court recognized the category of “transgender” as the “third gender” and introduced various measures to prevent discrimination against transgender individuals and protect their rights. The judgment also suggested that reservations should be made for transgender individuals in employment and educational institutions. Additionally, it affirmed the right of transgender individuals to identify their gender based on their self-perception, without the requirement of undergoing a sex reassignment surgery.
The Transgender Persons Act requires all establishments, including private employers, to adhere to certain regulations:
Prohibition of discrimination: Ensure a safe working environment and prevent any form of discrimination against transgender individuals in all aspects of employment, such as recruitment, promotions, infrastructure adjustments, employment benefits, and related matters.
Equal opportunity policy: Develop and publish an equal opportunity policy specifically for transgender persons. Display this policy on the company website, and if there is no website, post it at a conspicuous place within the premises.
Infrastructural facilities: Provide necessary infrastructure adjustments, including unisex toilets, to cater to the needs of transgender employees. Take measures to ensure their safety and security, such as transportation arrangements and security guards. Additionally, ensure the availability of amenities like hygiene products for transgender employees.
Confidentiality of identity of the transgender employees to be ensured at workplaces.
Appointment of Complaint Officers: Establishments are obligated to assign a complaint officer who will handle any grievances concerning the infringement of the regulations stated in the Transgender Persons Act. The designated complaint officer is entrusted with the responsibility of investigating the complaints, and it is mandatory for the head of the establishment to act upon the report produced by the complaint officer within the specified timeframes.
Got a question? Call us on 9930156000
References
Constitution of India, Article 14
Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act, 2016, Section 21
• The nature of the subject matter of the case at hand has been weighed and adjudicated upon around the world across various jurisdictions. In order to observe the case at hand more objectively and illuminate the grounds and discussions which have been placed before the Honourable Supreme Court thus far, we have laid out a summary of the facts of the case:
• The Petitioners identify themselves as gay men and are Indian citizens. Both petitioners, presently aged about 32 and 35 years respectively, have been in a committed relationship for almost a decade.
• On 17.08.2021, the Petitioners held a ceremony in the presence of their families, friends and colleagues.
• However, despite a decade long committed relationship, the Petitioners are unmarried in the eyes of law as the legal regime around recognition and solemnization of marriages excludes marriage between a same-sex couple.
• Despite the ceremony, the Petitioners realized that they are legally incapable of exercising the rights of married individuals and strangers in the eyes of the law, such as securing health insurance which would include their partner, nominating each other for life insurance, mutual funds, PPF, pension scheme, or any other financial instruments. Legally, they do not have the right to inheritance, property, to take medical or end-of-life decisions pertaining to each other.
• In light of the same, the Petitioners filed their PIL before the Hon’ble Supreme Court seeking recognition and solemnization of same-sex marriage.
Questions In Point
The Hon’ble Supreme Court is hearing the matter based involving the following issues:
• Recognition of Same-Sex Marriage: Whether same-sex marriage or non-heterosexual marriage can be recognized and solemnized under the Special Marriage Act, 1954?
• Constitutionality of the Special Marriage Act: Whether the Special Marriage Act, 1954 can be declared to be unconstitutional and violative of Articles 14, 15, 19 and 21 of the Constitution of India to the extent that it does not provide for solemnization of marriage between a same sex couple?
Recognition of same-sex marriage
Petitioners
UoI
• Broad interpretation to be made of the word “spouse” under Special Marriage Act, 1954 (“SMA”) and its meaning should not be confined merely to and be read as “a man and a woman”. Additionally, Section 4, SMA, which refers to a marriage in gender-neutral terms, between ‘any two persons’. However, it was clarified that merely amending the SMA isn’t enough and that a constitutional declaration of marriage, akin to that of the heterogeneous group, is needed. • It is important to remove the 30-day notice period under Section 5 of the SMA on the grounds that it invites unwarranted interference and such notice period violates an individual’s privacy along with their personal and decisional autonomy. • Advocate Abhishek Manu Singhvi, Counsel to the Petitioner stated that “But on the canvas there are two crucial words here. ‘Marriage’ and ‘persons’. ‘Same sex’ is a slight misnomer. The correct word is ‘person’, not ‘same sex’.”* • It was contended that the State could not deny marriage equality on grounds of “impracticality” as the discriminatory laws were created by it • Excluding the LGBTQIA+ community from their right to marry sends a message that it is legitimate to differentiate between the commitments of heterosexual and non-heterosexual couples, by indicating that the latter’s marriages are not as significant as “real” marriages.
• The Supreme Court could not hear this case as it fell under the powers of Parliament. The Respondent’s Counsel argued that there are certain issues which are better left to the discretion of the Parliament. There is no discrimination, no breach of privacy, right of choosing one’s sexual orientation. • It was argued that argued that 160 laws would be impacted in the process of bringing marriage equality. • It was argued that the subject of marriage is in the concurrent list and the possibility of one state agreeing to it and another against it cannot be ruled out. In this scenario, the maintainability of the petition would come into question. • Counsel to the Respondent stated that “Societal acceptance of any relationship in the society is never dependent either on legislation or on judgments. It comes only from within. Let us accept it whether we like to accept it or not.” • It was argued that the legislative intent of the legislature throughout has been a relationship between a biological male and a biological female including Special Marriage Act. • It was argued that the concept of biological man means a biological man and the question of notion does not arise.
Recognition of same-sex marriage
Constitutionality of the Special Marriage Act
Petitioners
UoI
• The Counsel argued that “The right to marry non-heterosexual unions is implicit in Articles 14, 15, 16, 19 and 21 of the Indian Constitution, especially after the Supreme Court rulings in “Navtej Singh Johar vs. Union of India” and “KS Puttaswamy and Anr. vs. Union of India”. • It was contended that the State could not deny marriage equality on grounds of “impracticality” as the discriminatory laws were created by it. • It is a civil union, as permitted in some countries, is not a solution to what same-sex couples are asking for. civil unions are not an equal alternative and do not address constitutional anomalies presented by excluding non-heterosexual couples from the institution of marriage • Excluding the LGBTQIA+ community from their right to marry sends a message that it is legitimate to differentiate between the commitments of heterosexual and non-heterosexual couples, by indicating that the latter’s marriages are not as significant as “real” marriages. • Adv. Mukul Rohatgi argued that “Gender identity is one of the most fundamental aspects of life and refers to a person’s intrinsic sense of being male, female or transgender or transsexual.” • Inalienable right to privacy must be granted in sanctity of a natural right to privacy in the Constitution as a fundamental right and the soulmate of dignity. Therefore, privacy, dignity go in hand in hand. Dignity is a part of life lived to its fullest under Article 21.
• The lawmakers had a conscious intent to include only heterosexual marriages under the SMA and the said Act’s character and intent cannot be altered. • It was argued that under the SMA, the court cannot give rights to non-heterosexual couples that heterosexual couples don’t have. • The State has a ‘legitimate’ interest in regulating marriages, while citing aspects such as the age of consent, prohibition of bigamy, prescription of prohibited degrees of marriage, judicial separation, and divorce. • While the rulings in Navtej or Shafeen Jahan were monocentric, the present dispute is a “polycentric”, one that will affect several legal provisions, possibly wreaking collateral damage or side effects in its wake. • The Respondent’s Counsel stated that “The question is not right of equality, right of dignity or right of privacy of persons who belong to LGBTQ community. That is first. The question is right of conferment of a socio-legal status and whether that can be done by judicial adjudication. There was no law governing the rights and other rights and other immunities to the LGBTQ community.” • It was argued that the concept of biological man means a biological man and the question of notion does not arise.
Constitutionality of the Special Marriage Act
Observations by the Hon’ble Supreme Court
Question
Observations
Inclusion ofLGBTQ+ in SMA
• Justice D.Y. Chandrachud observed that “Man is not a definition of what your genitals are. It’s far more complex. That’s the point. So even when the Special Marriage Act says man and woman, the very notion of a man and a notion of a woman is not an absolute based on what genitals you have.” • There should be a declaration of the right to marry, then there are two courses of action according to you. Either the court then finds a legislative void in that Parliament has not legislated explicitly to recognize the right of marry, and therefore finding a legislative void, you supplant that deficiency so long as Parliament enacts the law. The other option is, to locate the modalities for implementing that declaration in existing law. • The notice issue is even in a heterosexual marriage, because you are saying that even in a heterosexual marriage, the fact that you have to give a notice and have people object to whether there should be a marriage or not, is unconstitutional.
Violation of Fundamental Rights due to marriage inequality
• There are two corresponding rights and perhaps duties and obligations as well. On the one hand the LGBTQ community has or a same sex couple is entitled to say, I have a right to make my own choices. We have our right to make our own choices, to live as we wish together and therefore, that is a part of our dignity our privacy. But equally, society can’t say that. Well, all right. We will recognize that right and we leave you alone. And we will not recognize your relationship. • It’s not enough, in terms of privacy to leave them alone and to make their choices but it is equally important to assert a ride equally, to have the recognition of those social institutions. Because private is an individual concept which allows you to get to the core of your being and to live your life as you want. But equally, each of us are social individuals, social animals, so to speak. And therefore, for society to assert that all right, we’ll leave you alone, or the state will leave you alone.
Observations by the Hon’ble Supreme Court
Key Takeaways, pending the Supreme Court’s judgment
• Public opinion on various LGBTQ+ rights in India has evolved over the years and verdicts passed by the Judiciary. The progress of laws relating to LGBTQ+ marriage in India has been a complex and evolving journey. While the decriminalization of homosexuality and the recognition of civil partnerships have marked significant milestones, marriage equality remains unrealized. However, the recognition of same-sex marriages has seen progress in certain states.
• The LGBTQIA+ community has averred that it needs an anti-discrimination law that gives them the freedom to forge fulfilling relationships and lives regardless of their gender identity or sexual orientation and places the responsibility for change on the state and society rather than the person. The assertion is that when individuals belonging to the LGBTQ community are granted their complete set of constitutional rights, it is imperative to acknowledge their right to marry the person (and not only a man or a woman) of their choosing.
• However, while there is growing acceptance and support for equality, there is continued opposition to same-sex marriages.
• The arguments made against the petition were on both technical grounds (the jurisdiction of the Supreme Court qua the Parliament to confer rights of a socio-legal status, and the non-joinder of the States for an issue on the concurrent list of the Constitution), and on the grounds of maintainability (considering the provisions of the Transgender Act which already prohibit discrimination, and on the impact on personal laws and their amendment).
• After a hearing that ran for 10 days, the Honourable Supreme Court reserved its verdict on the batch of petitions seeking legal recognition of same-sex marriages.
With the increasing awareness and hype surrounding Cryptocurrency, NFTs, and other Digital Currencies, understanding the concept of Blockchain Technology has become crucial. Blockchain technology is a distributed digital ledger that records data, documents, and transactions securely and transparently.
Key Features of Blockchain Technology:
Decentralized: Blockchain allows for a decentralized network composed of multiple nodes or participants. This ensures the network is secure and minimizes the risk of malicious interference while providing financial sovereignty and democratic control to participants.
Peer-to-Peer (P2P): Blockchain technology leverages the power of P2P networks to provide a shared and reliable ledger of transactions. All nodes carry out the same tasks equitably without the presence of a central administrator.
Transparency: Blockchain makes transaction history more transparent, as all nodes on the network share a copy of the document, enabling all users to see updated records.
Security: Blockchain is superior to any other recording system, as it ensures all documents of transactions are updated or altered by consensus by the nodes in the network. This decentralized storage of information ensures that no individual holds the right to update records.
Efficiency: Blockchain streamlines transactional processes through traditional paperwork, minimizes the risk of error, eliminates the involvement of third-party beneficiaries, and makes transactions efficient and faster.
How Blockchain Technology Works:
Blockchain technology is the concept of digitally storing data in the most transparent, secure, and efficient way. The data is recorded on blocks and chained together cryptographically to create an unalterable digital ledger. Each participant on the Blockchain network has access to the entire database and its history, ensuring transparency, security, and efficiency. Let us now try to understand the working of the Blockchain technology from the flowchart below:
Types of Blockchains:
Public Blockchain: Also known as Permissionless Blockchains, Public blockchains are open networks that allow anyone to participate in the network. The data on a public blockchain is secure as it is not possible to modify the data or interfere with the same once it is validated on the blockchain.
Private Blockchain: Private blockchains, also known as authorized blockchains, are managed by the network administrator and only a single organization has authority over the network.
Potential Use Cases:
Cryptocurrency: The most well-known use of Blockchain Technology is for cryptocurrency exchanges. When people exchange or spend cryptocurrency, the transactions are recorded on a blockchain, with each block representing a separate transaction that is validated by the participants in the network.
Financial Exchanges: Blockchains can also be used for traditional exchanges to allow for faster and less expensive transactions. Decentralized exchanges provide better management and security because investors do not have to deposit their assets with a central authority.
Banking: Blockchain may be used to process transactions in fiat currency such as dollars and euros to make such transfers secure, quick, and more economical, especially for processing cross-border transactions.
Insurance: Using smart contracts on the blockchain can increase the transparency of customers and insurers. Recording all claims on the blockchain would prevent duplicate claims for the same event and speed up the process for applicants to receive payments.
Lending: Smart contracts built on the blockchain allow for secure lending, triggering the payment of services, margin calls, full repayment of loans, the release of collateral, etc. on the happening of certain events.
Real Estate: By recording real estate transactions using blockchain technology, a safer and more accessible way to identify and transfer real estate can be provided, speeding up transactions, reducing paperwork, and saving costs.
Healthcare: Blockchain can be used to protect medical records, health records, and other related electronic records, ensuring that medical professionals have accurate and up-to-date information about their patients and improve treatment.
Drawbacks of Blockchain Technology:
Power Consumption: The power consumption in the blockchain is high due to mining activities, maintaining a real-time ledger, and communicating with other nodes.
Scalability: The size of the block equals the data it stores, which poses serious difficulties for practical use, as each participant node needs to verify and approve a transaction.
Storage: Blockchain databases are stored indefinitely on all network nodes, causing storage space issues.
Privacy and Security: The public blockchain is not entirely secure as anyone on the network can legally access data, leading to privacy concerns.
Regulations: Regulatory regimes in the financial arena are a challenge for blockchain implementation, as blockchain applications need to establish a process to identify the culprit in the event of a scam.
In conclusion, Blockchain Technology is a powerful tool with numerous potential use cases and benefits, especially in the rapidly growing field of Cryptocurrency, NFTs, and digital currencies. However, there are also drawbacks to be considered, such as power consumption, scalability, storage, privacy and security, and regulatory challenges. Despite these challenges, the potential benefits of blockchain technology make it an important development to watch as it continues to evolve and adapt to new regulatory regimes. As the world becomes more technologically advanced, it is essential to stay informed about the latest developments in blockchain technology, as it has the potential to revolutionize how we store and exchange data in the future.
FAQs about Blockchain Technology
What are the main benefits of using blockchain technology?
Blockchain technology offers several benefits, including decentralization, transparency, security, and efficiency. By providing a decentralized network, blockchain ensures that the network is secure and minimizes the risk of malicious interference while giving participants control and financial sovereignty. Additionally, blockchain offers transparency by making transaction history more visible to all participants, and it provides security by ensuring that documents of transactions are updated or altered by consensus by the nodes in the network.
How is blockchain technology different from traditional database technology?
Blockchain technology differs from traditional database technology in several ways. First, blockchain is a distributed ledger that is shared among participants in a decentralized network, while traditional databases are often centralized, controlled by a single party or authority. Additionally, blockchain is more secure due to its decentralized nature, while traditional databases are more vulnerable to malicious interference. Lastly, while traditional databases require specific permissions to access and modify data, blockchain enables participants to access records while maintaining security and transparency.
How does blockchain technology and cryptocurrencies work together?
Blockchain technology and cryptocurrencies work together as blockchain is the underlying technology that allows cryptocurrencies to operate securely, transparently, and efficiently. Each cryptocurrency uses a specific blockchain to record transactions, where each transaction is verified and then added to a new block in the chain.
Can blockchain technology be used in industries beyond finance?
Yes, blockchain technology has a wide range of potential applications beyond finance, including industries like healthcare, insurance, supply chain management, and more. For example, blockchain technology can be used to protect medical records, ensuring that medical professionals have accurate and up-to-date information about their patients.
How do you ensure the security of blockchain technology?
Blockchain technology is inherently secure due to its decentralized nature, making it incredibly difficult for malicious actors to interfere with the network. Additionally, several other security measures can be taken to make sure blockchain technology is secure, such as encrypting data, using multi-factor authentication, and implementing measures to prevent unauthorized access to the network.
Registered office address (to be skipped if the Business is yet to be set up)
–
–
Brief Description of the Business
–
Note: This can be a 2-3 line description of the industry/sector where the Company currently operates and any differentiating factors.
Face Value of Equity Shares
–
–
Chairman of the Board
–
–
II. FOUNDERS
Particulars
Responses
Remarks / Examples
Name and Address of the Founders
Founder 1: –
Founder 2: –
PAN/ Tax Registration Number of the Founders
Founder 1: –
Founder 2: –
Founders who are a party to a pre-existing Shareholders Agreement (if any)
–
Monetary Contribution of each Founder (if any)
Founder 1: –
Founder 2: –
Shareholding Pattern of the Founders before the execution of the Co-Founders’ Agreement (to be skipped if the Business is yet to be set up)
Founder 1: –
Founder 2: –
Shareholding Pattern of the Founders as on the execution of the Co-Founders’ Agreement
Founder 1: –
Founder 2: –
Maximum amount of financial assistance that can be provided by the Business to each of the Founders during the course of Business
–
III. DECISION MAKING AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION
Particulars
Responses
Remarks / Examples
Founder whose opinion will hold more weight in case of any conflict with respect to the Business
–
Note: This can be an internal ‘veto’ right granted to one or more Founders, and is extremely customizable to the relationships between the Founders and their responsibilities. For example, one Founder may hold the deciding vote in general or have the final say on specific parts of the business such as design, costs, funding, or hires.
How will the day-to-day and major decisions of the Business be taken?
–
Note: Similar to the ‘veto’ mentioned above, this is customizable to match the working relationship between Founders. While one Founder may control day-to-day operations, another may be the decision-maker for the long-term direction. Alternatively, a voting mechanism can be set up for multiple Founders.
How will a sale of the Business be decided?
–
Example: To be decided by the Board/mutual agreement of the Founders. In case the parties have executed a SHA, this will ideally also be covered under reserved matters to be taken upon consent from the investor.
Dispute resolution in case one of the Founders is not performing his duties in accordance with the Co-Founders’ Agreement
–
Example: To be decided by the Board/such Founder may be terminated upon a simple majority of the other Founders. While this is difficult to account for at an early stage, it’s important to set checks and balances to avoid any disconnect in goals, ideals, and responsibilities.
IV. EXIT OPTIONS
Particulars
Responses
Remarks / Examples
Procedure to be followed by the Founders in case of resignation
–
Example: Prior written notice of 60 (sixty) days is to be provided to the Company. The Founder may not, in lieu of notice, pay the company his salary for the notice period, and may not also avail leave.
Can any of the Founder’s employment with the Business be terminated in the following situations? If yes, what will be the procedure followed by the Business to terminate such Founder’s employment?
–
Example: (a) For Cause (fraud, negligence, misconduct, crime of moral turpitude, material breach): Yes – the board may terminate the Founder’s employment with immediate effect by simple majority. (b) Without Cause (restructuring, cost cutting, underperformance): Yes – the board shall provide the Founder with an opportunity to present his case and may terminate his employment with 60 days’ notice or relieve him from duties or pay his salary.
Procedure to be followed by the Business in case any permanent disability is suffered by any Founder
–
Example: Agreement shall be terminated immediately in case the Founder is unable to perform his duties for a continuous period of 3 (three) months.
Would the Founder be obliged to leave his position as a Director on the Board in the following situations?
–
Example: (a) Termination of the Founder’s employment by the Business: Yes (b) Resignation by the Founder: Yes
Time period for which the exiting Founders shall be contractually obliged to not work with or as a competitor to the Business
–
Example: 1 year. This restriction, while falling into a grey area in terms of enforceability, is important to ensure that the Company’s confidential and proprietary information doesn’t become available to a competitor (whether directly or indirectly). Considering the goodwill carried by Founders, it is likely that courts will uphold such clauses.
V. TRANSFER OF SHARES
Particulars
Responses
Remarks / Examples
How will the Founder shares be dealt with in the following situations: (Please provide the details if any buyback options shall be given to the Business or remaining Founders)
–
Example: (a) Termination of the Founder’s employment by the Business: – For Cause: The company shall be entitled to purchase the unvested and vested shares at their face value or such other lower price as may be permissible under applicable law / as determined by the Board / in case of existing SHA, to be dealt with as described in the transaction document. – Without Cause: The company shall be entitled to purchase unvested shares at their face value or such other lower price as may be permissible under applicable law, and the vested shares at the fair market value / as determined by the Board / in case of existing SHA, to be dealt with as described in the transaction document. (b) Resignation by the Founder: The company shall be entitled to purchase unvested shares at their face value or such other lower price as may be permissible under applicable law, and the vested shares at the fair market value / as determined by the Board / in case of existing SHA, to be dealt with as described in the transaction document.
How will the market value of Shares be determined in case a Founder wants to sell his Shares?
–
Example: Fair market value / last valued round.
VI. DISSOLUTION OR SALE OF THE BUSINESS
Particulars
Responses
Remarks / Examples
What will happen to the Intellectual Property of the Business in case of the following:
–
Example: (a) Dissolution of the Business: If any compensation is received from the intellectual property owned by the company, the proceeds will be divided among the Founders in the ratio of their shareholding in the company. (b) Sale of the Business: Remains with the Business. (c) Termination of the Founder’s employment by the Business: Remains with the Business. (d) Resignation by the Founder: Remains with the Business.
Who will retain the original brand name of the Business?
–
Example: To be decided at the time of sale as part of negotiation / any Founder having the highest shareholding or who has single-handedly established the brand name.
Sample Responses
Particulars
Responses
Remarks / Examples
Name of the Business
–
–
Registered office address (to be skipped if the Business is yet to be set up)
–
–
Brief Description of the Business
–
Note: This can be a 2-3 line description of the industry/sector where the Company currently operates and any differentiating factors.
Face Value of Equity Shares
–
–
Chairman of the Board
–
–
Vesting conditions of each of the Founder’s shares (if any)
–
Example: Vesting conditions may be different for the Founders. This could include yearly, monthly, or quarterly vesting or vesting based on milestones achieved by the Business. For instance:Founder 1: Shares to be vested on an annual basis over a period of 4 years.Founder 2: 40% to be vested upon achieving 50,000 customers and 60% upon 1.5L customers.Founder 3: 25% to be vested on [date], and 75% monthly over 3 years.
Roles and Responsibilities of each Founder
–
Example:Founder 1: CEO, Head business development, investor relations, B2B sales, sourcing components, legal/compliance.Founder 2: CTO, OS/Apps/Cloud, overall product security.
Time and commitment to the Business expected of each Founder
–
Example: Founder 1: Full-time.Founder 2: Part-time (can also specify hours per day or days per week).
Which Founders hold a position of Director on the Board?
Founder 1: –
Founder 2: –
Remunerations including salary, bonus, commission, etc. (if any) of each Founder
Founder 1: –
Founder 2: –
Whether the Founders’ rights shall be inheritable? If yes, will the successors of the Founders have the same rights as such Founder or merely be Shareholders in the Business?
–
Note: While employment contracts are personal in nature, some Founders may choose to name successors to take over in their stead. Further, as shareholders, Founders are required to name nominees in case of death or disabilities.
External Commercial Borrowings (“ECB”) are commercial loans raised by eligible resident entities from recognized non- resident entities and should conform to parameters such as minimum maturity, permitted and non permitted end-uses, maximum all-in-cost ceiling, etc. Transactions on account of ECBs are governed by the provisions of Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 and the Master Direction – External Commercial Borrowings, Trade Credits and Structured Obligations (2018-19) issued by the RBI and as amended from time to time (“ECB Master Directions”)
External Commercial Borrowings (“ECB”) are commercial loans raised by eligible resident entities from recognized non- resident entities and should conform to parameters such as minimum maturity, permitted and non permitted end-uses, maximum all-in-cost ceiling, etc. Transactions on account of ECBs are governed by the provisions of Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 and the Master Direction – External Commercial Borrowings, Trade Credits and Structured Obligations (2018-19) issued by the RBI and as amended from time to time (“ECB Master Directions”)
RBI permitted Startups to raise ECB with the introduction of new guidelines vide its circular dated 16th January, 2019. Pursuant to the said guidelines, AD Category-I Banks are permitted to allow recognized Startups to raise ECB under the automatic route as per the prescribed framework
Recognized Lenders
•Lender/Investor, who is a resident of a Financial Action Task Force compliant country
•The recognized lenders do not include the following:
Indian banks’ foreign branches or their Indian subsidiaries; and
Overseas entity in which Indian entity has made overseas direct investment
Key Considerations
Term
Brief description
MAMP*
MAMP for ECB will be 3 years.
Forms
The borrowing can be in form of loans or non-convertible, optionally convertible or partially convertible preference shares
Currency
The borrowing should be denominated in any freely convertible currency or in Indian Rupees (INR) or a combination thereof
Amount
The borrowing per Startup will be limited to USD 3 million or equivalent per financial year (either in INR or any convertible foreign currency or a combination of both)
All-in-cost
As may be mutually agreed between the lender and borrower
End-uses
For any expenditure in connection with the business of the borrower
Choice of Security
At the discretion of the borrower. Security can be in the nature of: -movable assets; -Immovable assets; -intangible assets (including patents, intellectual property rights); -financial securities and shall comply with foreign direct investment or foreign portfolio investment/ or any other norms applicable to foreign lenders -Issuance of corporate and personal guarantee. Guarantee is only allowed if such parties qualify as lender under ECB for start-ups
Conversion Rate
In case of borrowing in INR, the foreign currency – INR conversion will be at the market rate as on the date of agreement
Notes : * MAMP: Minimum Average Maturity Period * All-in-cost: It includes rate of interest, other fees, expenses, charges, guarantee fees, Export Credit Agency charges, whether paid in foreign currency or INR but will not include commitment fees and withholding tax payable in INR.
Other Provisions
Term
Brief description
Parking of ECB Proceeds
ECB Proceeds can be parked abroad as well as domestically •If ECB Proceeds parked/repatriated to India, ECB borrowers are allowed to park ECB proceeds for a maximum period of 12 months cumulatively
Reporting arrangements
Submission of Form ECB and obtaining loan registration number (LRN) •Any change in terms and conditions of ECB should be reported to DSIM through revised form ECB •Monthly reporting through form ECB 2
Conversion of ECB into Equity
• Conversion is allowed subject to the conditions such as (without limitation): – activity should be covered under automatic route for FDI or government approval is received where required -conversion must not contravene eligibility or applicable sectoral cap on foreign equity holding -compliance with applicable pricing guidelines • The exchange rate prevailing on the date of the agreement between the parties concerned for such conversion or any lesser rate can be applied with a mutual agreement with the ECB lender •Equity ratio of 7:1 not applicable
Non applicability ofEquity-liability ratio
The requirement of equity liability ratio of 7:1 as prescribed under the ECB Master Directions is not applicable for start-ups
Other provisions summarised in short
Process Flow
ECB FOR START-UPS
Notes : LRN: Any drawdown in respect of an ECB should happen only after obtaining the LRN from the RBI. To obtain the LRN, borrowers are required to submit duly certified Form ECB, which also contains terms and conditions of the ECB, in duplicate to the bank Monthly Reporting of Actual Transactions: Form ECB 2 Return through the AD Bank on monthly basis.
The Startup India initiative was announced by Hon’ble Prime Minister of India on 15th August, 2015. The Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade (DPIIT), previously known as the Department of Industrial Policy and Promotion (DIPP), is the nodal agency for dealing with matters related to startups in India. To obtain the benefits of “startups” under the Startup India initiative, as outlined above, recognition from DPIIT is necessary. DPIIT is the monitoring authority for registering all Startups under the scheme.
One of the key issues that an entity, being a startup, faces is not having adequate knowledge about what qualifies as a “Startup” under the Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade (“DPIIT”). Due to lack of unawareness, many entities fail to avail the benefits applicable and attracted to them under the Startup India Action Plan prescribed vide notification No. G.S.R. 34 (E) dated January 16, 2019 issued by the Ministry of Commerce and Industry.
Under the DPIIT Scheme, an entity shall be considered as a startup:
● Upto a period of ten years from the date of incorporation/ registration, if it is incorporated as a private limited company (as defined in the Companies Act, 2013) or registered as a partnership firm (registered under section 59 of the Partnership Act, 1932) or a limited liability partnership (under the Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008) in India.
● Turnover of the entity for any of the financial years since incorporation/ registration has not exceeded INR 100 crore
● Entity is working towards innovation, development or improvement of products or processes or services, or if it is a scalable business model with a high potential of “employment generation” or “wealth creation”.
Provided that an entity formed by splitting up or reconstruction of an existing business shall not be considered a ‘Startup’
The other major concern is lack of information about the registration process, the documents required for making registrations, collating the information and documents and uploading the same on the portal. The company will need the Charter documents of the Company i.e. MOA and AOA, Certificate of Incorporation, Pitch deck of the Company, Link of the company website(optional), Intellectual Property Registration Certificates (if applicable), Proof of any funding received by the company (MCA records, capital structure of the company, bank statements etc), Aadhar card of the authorized signatory making application on behalf of the Company, Director details (DIN, PAN, Address, contact details), Company details (CIN, Address, authorized signatory details for the Company).
In order to help ease the process, here are a few things one needs to bear in mind while initiating the registration process.
Preliminary process for registration:
● The Company needs to make a profile on the Startup India Portal. The registered email id will then receive an OTP and once that is confirmed the profile can be operated using the login credentials entered for registration.
● The User will have to complete the profile by adding the company specific details i.e. name of the company, CIN, the industry that the company operates, area of operation, stage of development the startup is currently at (ideation, validation early traction, scaling) etc
● The User will have to provide company specific responses to the questions basis which, at the discretion of the DPIIT, the application will be accepted/rejected or asked for clarification in case of any deficiency.
Questions on the portal:
a.Details of the innovation product/service or improvement in any existing product/service the Startup aims to create/provide
b. What is the problem that the startup aims to solve
c. How does your startup propose to solve this problem
d. What is the uniqueness of the solution provided by the startup.
e. How does startup generate revenue. Etc.
The authorized signatory signing and making application on behalf of the Company needs to be authorized by the other director/s of the Company and the same needs to be authenticated by signing a Letter of Authorisation (in the format provided on the startup India portal).
Once the application is submitted, the department will, at its discretion, approve the application of the Company.
Currently in India there are 29 labour laws which needs to be followed by all the entities. To make it more streamlined and hassle free the Ministry of Labour is under the process of consolidating all the labour laws under 4 new labour law codes (“Labour Codes”)
•Code on Wages
•Occupational Safety, Health and Working Conditions Code
•Social Security Code
•Industrial Relations Code
These Labour Codes are yet to be notified.
In India, the labour laws can be divided into compliance under central laws and the specific state laws.
We have compiled a list of central laws and examples of specific state laws herein.
Sr. No
Labour Laws
Applicability
Registration/Implementation
Penalty for non-compliance with the applicable laws
1
Employee’s State Insurance Act, (ESI Act 1948)
a) Working with the aid of power- 10 or more employees b) Without the aid of power- 20 or more employees
Section 2-A of the Act read with Regulation 10-B, registration within 15 days from the date of its applicability to them
Imprisonment for a period extending up to 2 years and a fine of up to INR 5,000.
2
Prevention of Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace (Prevention Prohibition and Redressal Act, 2013) (“POSH Act”)
Applicable to all organizations, however the formation of an internal committee is applicable when there are 10 or more employees
The company has to elect an internal committee and pass a board resolution for adopting the internal committee as per the provisions of POSH Act
A fine of INR 50,000
3
Maternity Benefit Act, 1961
Any organization with 10 or more employees
No registration required. However, an organization needs to maintain a muster roll. An organization is required to provide for first and second-time mothers, a leave of 6 months, or 26 weeks, off, which is a paid leave wherein her employer needs to pay her in full.
Imprisonment which may extend to 3 months, or with fine which may extend to INR 500, or with both.
4
Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972
Any organization with 10 or more employees
Form A to be filed within 30 days of registration
punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend to six months, or with fine which may extend to ten thousand rupees or with both
5
Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act, 2016
Any organization with 20 or more employees
a) Form E for registration under Rule 27(3). b) Organization needs to appoint a grievance officer as a compliance
Imprisonment up to 6 months and/ or a fine of INR 10,000, or both
6
Equal Remuneration Act, 1976
No minimum applicability
Form D- Register to be maintained by the employer
Penalty levied may be up to INR 10,000
7
Payment of Bonus Act, 1965
Any organization with 20 or more employees
In case of new establishments, for the first 5 years, bonus is payable only if the business is profitable.
Imprisonment for six months or may impose a fine of INR. 1000 or both
8
The Employees’ Provident Funds and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952
Any organization with 20 or more employees
Form 5 to be filled by employers for enrolling new employees for this scheme
For delay in payment of PF- a)For 0 — 2 months delay – @ 5 % p.a. b)For 2 — 4 months delay – @10 % p.a. c)For 4 — 6 months delay – @ 15 % p.a. d)For delay above 6 months – @ 25 % p.a. (subject to a maximum of 100%)
List of Central Labour Laws applicable to Start-ups
State Specific Labour Laws applicable to Start-ups
Types Of Applicable Legislations For Specific States:
•State-specific shops and establishment acts
•State-specific labour welfare acts
•State-specific professional tax acts
STATE OF MAHARASHTRA AND KARNATAKA COVERED HEREIN
State Specific Labour Laws applicable to Start-ups
A. For Maharashtra
Sr. No
Labour Laws
Applicability
Registration/Implementation
Penalty for non-compliance with the applicable laws
1
Maharashtra Shops and Establishment Act, 1948
Applicable to all organizations. Any organization with 10 or more employees needs to register.
Form A to be filed for registration
Fine which shall be not less than INR 1,000 but which may extend to INR 3,000 along with the prescribed registration or renewal Fee
2
Maharashtra Labour Welfare Fund Act, 1953
Any organization with 05 or more employees
Form A to be filed for registration
A fine of INR 500 and/or imprisonment up to 3 months
3
The Maharashtra State Tax on Profession, Trades, Callings and Employments Act, 1975
Applicable to all organizations/ establishments
Form I-I and I-II to be filled for enrollment
Employer will be liable to pay a simple interest @ 1.25% of the tax payable for each month for which the tax remains unpaid.
Maharashtra Labour Laws applicable to Start-ups
B. For Karnataka
Sr. No
Labour Laws
Applicability
Registration/Implementation
Penalty for non-compliance with the applicable laws
1
Karnataka Shops and Commercial Establishments Act, 1961
Applicable to all. Organizations with 10 or more employees have to register
Registration of establishment in Form B
punishable with fine up to INR 1,000 and in case of a continuing contravention, a further fine of up to INR 2,000 for every day during which such contravention continues
2
The Karnataka Tax on Professions, Trades, Callings And Employment Act, 1976
Applicable to all person working in Karnataka
Registration of establishment under Sec 5
Penalty not exceeding fifty per cent of the amount of tax due. This penalty shall be in addition to the interest payable under sub-section (2) or (3) of section 11.
If you are a foreign investor investing in Indian companies or a startup raising money from foreign investors post April 1, 2023, angel tax is now applicable. We have summarized the implications for you below
Upto March 31, 2023:
Non-resident investors (typically offshore PE/VC funds) generally made primary investment in Indian startups at a price which was above the FMV as per the valuation report without there being any income tax implications. The reason was that it allowed investor to have room to exercise their anti dilution liquidation preference rights by revising the conversion ratio incase of a down round*.
From April 1, 2023 onwards:
While the FEMA pricing rules as discussed above continue as it is, section 56(2)(viib) of the Income-tax Act, 1961 now provides that the Indian company will be liable to pay tax if it issues shares to a non-resident at a price above its FMV (as determined by a merchant banker). Thus, Indian company will have to issue shares to non-resident investors exactly at FMV.
Further, implementation of such investor protection clauses may not be as straightforward and the non-resident investors will need to look at alternate options such as rights issue or bonus issue or buyback, etc
*As per FEMA rules, price at the time of conversion should not be lower than the FMV at the time of issuance
The Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology (“MeiTY”), vide notification dated April 6, 2023 released the Information Technology (Intermediary Guidelines and Digital Media Ethics Code) Amendment Rules, 2023 (“Amended Rules”), whereby the Information Technology (Intermediary Guidelines and Digital Media Ethics Code) Amendment Rules, 2021 were amended in order to provide for certain regulations with respect to online gaming industry. View complete Amended Rules
• The following new terms have been defined:
a) online game (Rule 2(1)(qa))
b) online gaming intermediary(Rule 2(1)(qb))
c) online gaming self-regulatory body(Rule 2(1)(qc))
d) online real money game (Rule 2(1)(qd))
e) permissible online game (Rule 2(1)(qe))
f) permissible online real money game (Rule 2(1)(qf))
• Online self-regulatory body (SRO) shall verify an online real money game as a permissible online real money game. Main criteria would be to satisfy that (Rule 4A (3)):
(a) the online game doesn’t involve wagering on any outcome
(b) the users are at least 18 years of age
• Obligations on online gaming intermediaries to ensure compliance under IT act and also to not show, distribute or host any data that can cause harm to the users.
• Obligations on permissible online real money game providers:
(a) displaying a visible mark verification by such online self-regulatory body on such games
(b) informing users about withdrawal or refund of deposit policies
(c) the manner in which the determination of distribution of winnings, fees and other charges is done
2. New Concepts Introduced
Online games (Rule 2(1)(qa)) – A game that is offered on the Internet and is accessible by a user through a computer resource or an intermediary.
Online real money game (Rule 2(1)(qb)) – Online games where users make deposits in cash or kind with the expectation of earning winnings on that deposit. Examples of online real money games shall be: Dream 11, My Premier League and My11Circle.
Permissible online real money game (Rule 2(1)(qc)) – Online real money game verified by an online gaming self-regulatory body.
Permissible online games (Rule 2(1)(qd)) – (a) Permissible online real money game; or (b) any other online game that is not an online real money game.
Online self governing Body (Rule 2(1)(qe)) – MeitY may designate as many online gaming self-regulatory bodies as it may consider necessary for the purposes of verifying an online real money game as a permissible online real money game.
Online gaming intermediary (Rule 2(1)(qf)) – Any intermediary that enables the users of its computer resource to access one or more online games.
3. Changes in the Gaming Ecosystem
Business of the gaming entity
Law before the Amendment
Effect of the amendment
Online Gaming Intermediaries
Not regulated earlier.
Will be covered under the IT Act, 2000 and shall have a plethora of obligations. List of obligations found in further slides
OnlineFantasySports
Online fantasy sports, though not heavily regulated, is permitted all over India except few states namely • Assam, Sikkim, Nagaland, Andhra Pradesh, Odisha, Telangana and Tamil Nadu.
Online games covered here shall be taken up for consideration by the online self-regulatory body to be classified as a permissible online real money game, provided that the same (Rule 4A (3)): (a) does not involve wagering on any outcome (b) the user is at least 18 years of age.
eSports
Not regulated. However, recognised as a part of multi-sports events in India and recognised by the Ministry of Youth Affairs and Sports.
With respect to eSports, the online self-regulatory body shall ensure that its rules and regulations, privacy policy or user agreement inform the users not to host, display, upload, modify, publish, transmit, store, update or share any information that is in relation to an online game which causes harm (Rule 4 and Rule 5 (11)).
Online Casino Games including Poker
• Sikkim allows casino games, such as Casino and Blackjack • Nagaland and West Bengal allow Poker • Gujarat bans Poker.
Online games covered here shall be taken up for consideration by the online self-regulatory body to be classified as a permissible online real money game, provided that the same (Rule 4A (3)) : (a) is permitted by the applicable state enactment within a particular state’s territory (b) does not involve wagering on any outcome (c) the user is at least 18 years of age.
Changes in the gaming ecosystem
4. Obligations of Online Gaming Intermediary
Reasonable security practices and procedures as prescribed in the Information Technology (SPDI) Rules, 2011 (Rule 3(1)(i)).
To retain information for a period of 180 days from cancellation or withdrawal of his registration in case information is collected from user for registration (Rule 3(1)(g)).
To not deploy / install / modify technical configuration of computer resource or become party to any act that may change operations such computer resource thereby, circumventing any law (Rule 3(1)(g)).
To publish the rules and regulations, privacy policy and user agreement on its website or mobile based application (Rule 3(1)(a)) :
a) To inform its users of its rules and regulations, privacy policy or user agreement (or any changes) at least once in a year (Rule 3(1)(f))
(Online real money game intermediary shall inform its users of such changes as soon as possible, not later than 24 hours after such change is effected)*
(b) To not display, upload, publish or share any information that (Rule 3 (1) (b) of Amended Rules)–
• related to online games that causes a user harm
• is not verified as a permissible online game
• is in the nature of advertisement of an online game that is not permissible
• violates any law
(c) To include provisions to inform the user not to host, display, upload or share any information that belongs to another person, is defamatory, obscene, pornographic, pedophiliac, invasive of another‘s privacy, including bodily privacy, racially or ethnically objectionable, relating or encouraging money laundering or gambling, is harmful to child, infringes any patent, trademark, copyright or other proprietary rights, violates any law for the time being in force; any deceiving or misleading information, impersonates another person; threatens the unity, integrity, defense, security or sovereignty of India, contains software virus or any other computer code (Rule 3(1)(b)).
5.Online Self Regulatory Body
Criteria to apply (Rule 4(A)) –
Should be a company
Membership is representative of gaming industry
Members are offering & promoting online games in a responsible manner
Board of directors –individuals with special knowledge or practical experience suitable for the performance of functions of self-regulatory body
the MOA and AOA of such entity includes provisions regarding grievance redressals, framework for disclosure and accountability of the members of such body, etc.
Responsibilities (Rule 4(A)) –
to designate an online real money game (ORMG) as permissible
to prominently publish a framework for verifying an ORMG on its portal
to publish and maintain an updated list of all permissible ORMG verified by it
to ensure that ORMG so verified by it shall display a demonstrable and visible mark of such verification stating that ORMG is verified by the body as permissible
publish framework for redressal of grievances and the contact details of the Grievance Officer on its portal. An applicant aggrieved by decision of such body with respect to verification may make a complaint which is acknowledged by the Grievance Officer within 24 hours and resolved within 15 days from the date of its receipt.
6. Conclusion
The new rules create an umbrella framework for the online gaming industry. While the distinction of game skill/ game of chance has not been dealt with in these rules, it lays down the basic stepping stone to crystallize the online gaming industry’s challenges and provides clarity on various concepts that were hitherto only industry parlance.
Startups face the challenge of determining their value since they often lack revenue figures or hard facts. Thus, estimation is required, and startup valuation methods frameworks have been invented to help startups accurately gauge their valuation. Startup founders aim for high valuation while investors want the value low enough to see big returns on their investment. This article will discuss the factors that determine startup valuation, negative and positive. Additionally, it will cover startup valuation methods such as the Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Depreciation, and Amortization (EBITDA), Discounted Cash Flow (DCF) Method, Venture Capital Method amongst others
FACTORS THAT DETERMINE STARTUP VALUATION
Positive Factors
Traction – One of the biggest factors of proving a valuation is to show that your company has customers. If you have 100,000 customers you have a good shot at raising $1 million.
Reputation – If a startup owner has a track record of coming up with good ideas or running successful businesses, or the product, procedure or service already has a good reputation a startup is more likely to get a higher valuation, even if there isn’t traction.
Prototype – Any prototype that a business may have that displays the product/service will help.
Revenues – More important to business to business startups rather than consumer startups but revenue streams like charging users will make a company easier to value.
Supply and Demand – If there are more business owners seeking money than investors willing to invest, this could affect your business valuation. This also includes a business owner’s desperation to secure an investment, and an investors willingness to pay a premium.
Distribution Channel – Where a startup sells its product is important, if you get a good distribution channel the value of a startup will be more likely to be higher.
Industry Trends – If a particular industry is booming or popular (like mobile gaming) investors are more likely to pay a premium, meaning your startup will be worth more if it falls in the right industry.
Negative Factors
Poor Industryor Market – If a startup is in an industry that has recently shown poor performance, or may be dying off.
Low Margins – Some startups will be in industries, or sell products that have low-margins, making an investment less desirable.
Competition – Some industry sectors have a lot of competition, or other business that have cornered the market. A startup that might be competing in a cluttered market is likely to put off investors.
Management Not Up To Scratch – If the management team of a startup has no track record or reputation, or key positions are missing.
Product – If the product doesn’t work, or has no traction and doesn’t seem to be popular or if there isn’t a product-market fit.
Desperation – If the business owner is seeking investment because they are close to running out of cash.
2. STARTUP VALUATION METHODS
Early-stage startups usually have little to no revenue or profits; therefore, valuing them can be challenging. Angel investors and venture capital firms use multiple formulas to find the pre-money value of a business. With mature businesses that receive steady revenue and earnings and make profits, it is easier to value the company using a multiple of their earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation, and amortization (EBITDA).
Concept of EBITDA
EBITDA is best shown with the following formula – EBITDA = Net Profit + Interest +Taxes + Depreciation + Amortization
For example, if a company earns INR 10,00,000 in revenue and production costs are INR 4,00,000 with INR 2,00,000 in operating expenses and depreciation and amortization expense of INR 100,000 that leaves an operating profit of INR 300,000. The interest expense is INR 50,000 leading to earnings before taxes of INR 250,000. With a 20 percent tax-rate the net income becomes INR 200,000.
For calculating EBITDA, add tax and interest to the net profit of INR 200,000 to get the operating income of INR 300,000 and also add on the depreciation and amortization expense of INR 100,000 giving you a Earning Before Interest Tax Depreciation and Amortisation of INR 400,000.
Venture Capital Method
The Venture Capital Method employs a forecasted terminal value for the startup and an expected return from the investor to determine pre-money and post-money valuations.
The formula used is:
Pre-Money Valuation = Post Money Valuation — Invested Capital
With the Post-Money Valuation being the terminal value divided between the expected return.
Let’s say an investor values your startup at a terminal value of $1,000,000 and he wants a 20X return on his $10,000 investment. In this case, your Post-Money valuation would be $50,000. And, according to the Venture Capital Method, the Pre-Money Valuation would be:
Pre-Money = $50,000 — $10,000 = $40,000
This is another popular method utilized by a lot of venture capital firms. To calculate the value of the firm, you will need to derive the terminal value or the value at which you will be selling the business and the Return On Investment. Plugging in these values to the formulas will help you arrive at the solution. The formulas for the same are as follows:
Berkus Method
The Berkus Method, created by American venture capitalist and angel investor Dave Berkus is a straightforward method that values startups based on detailed assessment of five key aspects called as success factors :
Basic Value, Technology, Execution, Strategic Relationships and Production and Consequent Sales
A detailed assessment is carried out to evaluate how much monetary value is assigned to each aspect. The startup value is the sum of all those monetary values. This method usually allocates $500,000 per success factor so theoretically the maximum pre-money valuation is $2,500,000. Nevertheless, depending on the degree in which each element is developed the investor could reduce the value of the item to say $400,000 or $250,000, to determine the final value.
Though the Berkus Method is seen as an important method utilized by many startups, it fails to take into consideration a lot of other aspects of startup life. However, for a startup that is in the early stage of its life or in development stage with no revenue generation, this might be an ideal way to arrive at the valuation.
Discounted Cash Flow Method
Startups and risk go hand in hand. When compared to a normal or running business, startups are riskier. That being said, for the amount of risk you take, you will expect the same level of reward. The same idea is behind this method.
Here, you will be required to calculate the future discounted cash flows which your business will be getting throughout the period or estimated period. To that, you will have to apply a discount rate or ROI to arrive at the right value.
Now, if you are getting a higher discount rate, that means your returns from the business should also be higher, and so, your valuation increases. There are three main scenarios under this method that will offer insights into your valuation. They are:
Your business performing exactly the way you expected.
Business performance being poor than what was expected.
Business performance is better than what was expected.
Here, the sum of discounted values will be your valuation. This method depends on both future and historical data to arrive at the solution.
Given the fact that this method relies heavily on assumptions that require some historical data to be performed, it is not the most widely employed to value startups.
Market Multiple Method
A Market Multiple is calculated using recent acquisitions or transactions that are similar in nature to the company or startup in case on hand. The startup is then valued using the calculated Market Multiple.
CONCLUSION
To conclude, Start-up valuation depends a lot on judgment and qualitative factors like Founders and Co-Founders background, experience and passion, Business Model, Scalability potential of business (with or without technology), Competitive landscape, Current Traction. Startup’s often operate in the valley of death which requires considering the probability of their success and failure. In a way, Start-up valuation also involves validation of the business model which makes it complicated vis-vis other valuations. As everything is future driven in start-up, the experience of valuer plays a significant role in how to evaluate and value a startup.
FAQs
How to calculate the valuation of a startup based on funding?
The valuation of a startup based on funding is typically determined by the negotiation between the startup and the investor(s) during a funding round. The valuation is influenced by factors such as the startup’s growth potential, market traction, team expertise, competition, and the terms of the investment. Generally, the valuation is based on the amount of funding raised and the percentage of equity or ownership stake given to the investors.
2. How to value a startup without revenue?
Startups without revenue can be challenging to value since traditional financial metrics like revenue or profit may not be applicable. In such cases, valuation often relies on other factors such as the startup’s market potential, intellectual property, growth prospects, team expertise, traction, user base, partnerships, and competitive advantage. Comparable valuations of similar startups in the industry or the use of valuation models like the discounted cash flow (DCF) method or the market approach can also be considered.
3. How to value a loss-making startup?
Valuing a loss-making startup can be challenging since traditional financial metrics may not accurately reflect its potential. In such cases, valuation often relies on factors like market potential, intellectual property, team expertise, growth prospects, user base, partnerships, and competitive advantage. Investors may also consider the startup’s ability to generate future revenue, cost management strategies, the market demand for the product or service, and the startup’s progress in reaching key milestones.
4. How to calculate post-money valuation?
Post-money valuation refers to the value of a startup after a new round of funding has been received. It can be calculated by adding the amount of funding raised in the latest round to the pre-money valuation. For example, if a startup has a pre-money valuation of $5 million and raises $2 million in a funding round, the post-money valuation would be $7 million ($5 million + $2 million).
In life people want shortcuts, that’s the reason rules of thumb find someplace in one life. There are rules of thumb for everything. In games, always start with a good serve; for boiling eggs there is a six-minute boiling rule. Why should investing be an exception?
In investing, there are certain rules that help us gauge how fast our money will grow or how fast it will lose its value. There are rules to make investment making easier. Such as asset allocation in mutual funds, how much to save for retirement and for emergencies etc.
In this blog, we will learn about the most popular thumb rules in the world of investing.
Rules to understand how fast your money can grow –
Rule of 72 –
We all want the money we invest to double and are always on the lookout for the ways it can be done in the shortest amount of time. Well, calculating the number of years in which your money doubles is very easy with the Rule of 72.
According to this rule, if you divide 72 by the expected rate of return, you can get a fairly accurate estimate of the number of years your money can take to double.
For example, let’s suppose you have invested Rs 1 lakh in a product that provides you a rate of return of 6 percent. Now, if you divide the number 72 with 6, you arrive at 12. That means, your Rs 1 lakh will become Rs 2 lakh in 12 years.
You can also use the Rule of 72 to calculate the interest rate required for the investment to double in a set time frame.
For example, if you want your investment to double within 6 years, Doubling Time = 72/Rate of Return
Rate of Return = 72/Doubling Time = 72/6 =12% p.a.
Rule of 114 –
For determining the number of years it will take for your investment to triple itself, use the Rule of 114. According to this rule, if you divide the expected rate of return from 114, you can get an estimate of the number of years your money can take to triple.
The answer is the number of years in which your investment will triple. So, if you invest Rs 1 lakh in a product that gives you an interest rate of 6 percent, then as per the Rule of 114, it will become Rs 3 lakh in 19 years.
Rule of 144 –
Rule of 144 helps you ascertain in how many years your money will quadruple if you know the rate of return. By dividing the expected rate of return with 144, the remainder shall be the number of years required to quadruple the money invested.
Quadrupling Time = 144/Rate of Return
If you invest Rs.1,00,000 with an expected rate of return of 10% per annum, then
Quadrupling Time = 144/10 =14.4 years
Hence, you can expect your investment to triple in 14.4 years. It is important to remember that this rule is applicable in the case of investments that offer compound interest.
Rules to understand how fast your money value can diminish –
Rule of 70 –
Even if you don’t spend a single penny from the wealth you own today, the value in 10 or 20 years shall be way less than it is today. The reason being inflation. This rule helps you understand the value of money in 10 or 20 years keeping inflation in mind.
To calculate this, divide 70 by the current inflation rate. The remainder is the number of years in which your wealth will be worth half of what it is today.
For example – you have Rs 50 lakh, and the current inflation rate is 5%. In 14 years, your Rs 50 lakh will be worth Rs 25 lakh, according to the Rule of 70.
This is especially useful for retirement planning, as it affects the way you set up your monthly withdrawals. However, do keep in mind that the inflation rate keeps varying.
Some other rules to keep in mind while investing –
Rule of 10,5,3 –
When we invest money or even consider investing money, we usually look for the rate of return on our investments. The 10,5,3 rule will assist you in determining your investment’s average rate of return.
Though mutual funds offer no guarantees, according to this law, long-term equity investments should yield 10% returns, whereas debt instruments should yield 5%. And the average rate of return on savings bank accounts is around 3%.
100 minus age Rule –
The 100 minus age rule is a great way to determine one’s asset allocation. That is, how much you should allocate in equities and how much in debt.
For this, subtract your age from 100, and the number that you arrive at is the percentage at which you should invest in equities. The rest should be invested in debt.
For example, if you are 25 years old and you want to invest Rs 10,000 every month. Here if you use the 100 minus age rule, the percentage of your equity allocation would be 100 – 25 = 75 percent. Then Rs 7,500 should go to equities and Rs 2,500 in debt. Similarly, if you are 35 years old and want to invest Rs 10,000, then according to the 100 minus age rule the equity allocation would be 100 – 35 = 65 percent. That means, Rs 6,500 should go in equities and Rs 3,500 in debt.
Finally, to know if you are wealthy, follow this rule –
The Net Worth Rule –
Thomas J. Stanley and William D. Danko in “The Millionaire Next Door: The Surprising Secrets of America’s Wealthy” postulate that an average individual has a net worth equal to the product of their age and one-tenth of their pre-tax annual income. This should be the least net worth you should aim for. Remember that net worth includes not just your cash, investments and home equity but also tangible property like jewelry, furniture and other assets like books and paintings that you may own.
So if you’re 40 and make Rs 20 lakh a year, you should have a net worth equal to Rs 80 lakh, assuming you have no inheritance. If you want to secure your position as wealthy, your net worth should be double of that.
Conclusion
Sometimes Rules of thumb will give you a false sense of security or wrong guidance, they should always be taken with a pinch of salt. The thumb rules listed here are to be used as starting points – start here and tweak them based on your risk appetite, inherited wealth and personal goals.
FAQs
Q: What is the Rule of 72 in investing?
A: The Rule of 72 is a simple formula used to estimate the time it takes for an investment to double. To calculate the approximate doubling time, divide 72 by the expected rate of return.
Q: How can I use the Rule of 72 to calculate the required interest rate for doubling my investment?
A: If you want to determine the interest rate needed for your investment to double within a specific timeframe, use the formula: Rate of Return = 72 / Doubling Time.
Q: What is the Rule of 114 in investing?
A: The Rule of 114 is a guideline to estimate the time it takes for an investment to triple. Divide 114 by the expected rate of return to get an approximation of the number of years it may take for your investment to triple.
Q: How does the Rule of 144 help determine when an investment will quadruple?
A: The Rule of 144 assists in calculating the number of years required for an investment to quadruple. Divide 144 by the expected rate of return, and the remainder will indicate the approximate number of years it may take for the investment to quadruple.
Q: What is the Rule of 70 used for in investing?
A: The Rule of 70 helps understand the impact of inflation on the value of money over time. By dividing 70 by the current inflation rate, you can estimate the number of years it will take for your wealth to be worth half of its present value.
Q: What does the 10,5,3 rule signify in investing?
A: The 10,5,3 rule provides a guideline for expected average rates of return in different types of investments. It suggests that long-term equity investments may yield around 10% returns, debt instruments around 5%, and savings bank accounts approximately 3%.
Q: How does the 100 minus age rule determine asset allocation in investing?
A: The 100 minus age rule helps determine the percentage of investments to allocate in equities and debt. Subtract your age from 100, and the resulting number represents the percentage you should invest in equities, while the remainder should be allocated to debt.
Q: How can I calculate my net worth using the Net Worth Rule?
A: The Net Worth Rule suggests that your net worth should be equal to your age multiplied by one-tenth of your pre-tax annual income. This includes various assets like cash, investments, home equity, and other tangible properties you own.
Q: How can I assess if I am considered wealthy based on the Net Worth Rule?
A: According to the Net Worth Rule, to be considered wealthy, your net worth should be double the value determined by your age multiplied by one-tenth of your pre-tax annual income.
Q: Are these thumb rules definitive guidelines for investing?
A: Thumb rules are starting points and should be used with caution. Consider your risk appetite, personal goals, and inherited wealth while using these rules as a foundation for your investment decisions.
The regulatory landscape for startups in India is a constantly evolving space due to the dynamic and volatile nature of the country’s startup ecosystem. Cost-effective and innovative fundraising opportunities are a necessity for startups to succeed.
The Indian government, being aware of the above fact, regularly updates regulatory norms in accordance with the economic conditions and market dynamics. One of the fairly recent introductions by the government is the concept of ‘convertible notes’.
Convertible notes act as an instrument that evidences receipt of money initially as a debt, which is repayable at the option of the holder, or which can be convertible into equity shares of the startup company. Convertible notes are a hybrid of equity and debt instruments.
Convertible notes are primarily targeted towards startups as valuing companies during the initial phase of operations is often difficult. Since there’s no actual valuation for the startup’s shares, convertible notes become an attractive investment option for investors.
Under the Companies Act, 2013, a ‘convertible note’ was introduced as an exempted deposit (with respect to startup companies) under Rule 2(1)(c)(xvii) of Companies (Acceptance of Deposit) Rules, 2014.
To issue convertible notes, the startup company must be recognized as a “Startup” by the Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade. Further, the investment amount per investor should not be less than Rs. 25 lakh in a single tranche, otherwise the same shall be considered to be a deposit under the relevant provisions of the Companies Act, 2013 and shall attract the necessary compliances relating to ‘deposits’. As convertible notes are debt instruments, startup companies can issue the same under the provisions of Section 62(3) of the Companies Act, 2013, with the shareholders’ approval at a general meeting, and by notifying the Registrar of Companies by filing eForm MGT-14 within 30 days of having held the said general meeting.
Convertible notes offer extensive flexibility compared to other instruments like compulsorily convertible preference shares, compulsorily convertible debentures, or equity shares. They involve minimal regulatory reporting while issuing and valuation hassles, thus promising substantial traction in the Indian ecosystem.
FAQs about Convertible Notes under Companies Act, 2013
1. What exactly are convertible notes? Convertible notes are a financial instrument that acts as a hybrid of debt and equity. They allow startups to raise money by issuing a promise to: (a) either repay the debt; or (b) convert it into equity shares in the company at a later stage.
2. Are there any pre-conditions to issue convertible notes in India? Yes, there are two pre-conditions for issuing convertible notes in India: (a) the company issuing the convertible note must be recognized as a “Startup” by the DPIIT; and (b) the investment amount per investor should not be less than Rs. 25 lakh in a single tranche.
3. How can startups comply with regulations while issuing convertible notes in India? Startups must obtain shareholders’ approval by way of a special resolution at a general meeting and shall notify the Registrar of Companies of the same by filing eForm MGT-14 within 30 days of having held the meeting.
4. How is a convertible note different from a traditional loan? Unlike most traditional loans, convertible notes are convertible into equity shares of the startup company upon the occurrence of specified events. The investor also gets a right to receive equity shares of the startup company at a future date in lieu of repayment.
5. What advantages do convertible notes offer startups? Convertible notes are an attractive investment option because of their hybrid structure. They allow flexible fundraising, and bypass the initial valuation hassles that startups usually face, thus making them a promising investment option.
Liquidation is the process of closing a business and distributing its assets among stakeholders, creditors, and rightful claimants. In the event of a corporate liquidation, preferred shareholders recover their investments first, prior to all other shareholders, in the process known as Liquidation Preference. Liquidation preference is a form of protection for investors as it guarantees them a certain minimum payment, regardless of the company’s valuation at exit. Investors can choose between non-participating and participating liquidation preference.
Non-participating liquidation preference allows investors to receive predetermined returns without any share in the surplus. In contrast, participating liquidation preference allows investors to receive predetermined returns as well as a share of the surplus proceeds based on their shareholding.
Standard Seniority Liquidation Preference is followed by most early-stage companies, where liquidation preferences are honored in reverse order from the latest investment round to the earliest. Pari-Passu Seniority gives all preferred investors equal seniority status, meaning that all investors would share in at least some part of the proceeds. Tiered Seniority is a hybrid between standard and pari-passu seniority, with investors grouped into distinct seniority levels.
Investors ask for liquidation preference to protect themselves, particularly if a company fails to meet expectations and sells or liquidates at a lower valuation than anticipated. Liquidation preferences are expressed as a multiple of the initial investment and are most commonly set at 1X. In the event of liquidation, investors receive the full amount of their investment before any other equity holders or their share in the liquidation proceeds on a pro-rata basis, whichever is more. Understanding liquidation preference is important for founders to negotiate well with potential investors.
A BO is a suitable business model for foreign companies looking to establish a temporary presence in India. The BO serves as an extension of the head office business and carries on the same business and activity as that of its parent company. The foreign company can have any revenue from the Indian BO only from the activity allowed by the Reserve Bank of India (“RBI”). It has to meet all its expenses of Indian office through remittances from the head office or through the revenue generated from the Indian operation permitted by the RBI.
BO is suitable for a foreign company to test and understand the Indian market with a very strict control by the RBI, as it does allow the companies to do business but just to do the activity which are mentioned in the application of BO. The Master Direction on Establishment of Branch Office (BO)/ Liaison Office (LO)/ Project Office (PO) or any other place of business in India by foreign entities shall be relevant for setting up of the BO.
Permitted Activities
Companies incorporated outside India and engaged in manufacturing or trading activities are allowed to set up BO in India and undertake the following activities in India;
i. Export/import of goods.
ii. Rendering professional or consultancy services (other than practice of legal profession in any matter).
iii. Carrying out research work in which the parent company is engaged.
iv. Promoting technical or financial collaborations between Indian companies and parent or any overseas group company.
v. Representing the parent company in India and acting as buying/ selling agent in India.
vi. Rendering services in information technology and development of software in India.
vii. Rendering technical support to the products supplied by parent/group companies.
viii. Representing a foreign airline/shipping company.
General Criteria
Applications from foreign companies (a body corporate incorporated outside India, including a firm or other association of individuals) for establishing BO in India shall be considered by the AD Category-I (“AD”) bank as per the guidelines given by RBI.
An application from a person resident outside India for opening of a BO in India shall require prior approval of Reserve Bank of India and shall be forwarded by the AD Category-I bank to the General Manager, Reserve Bank of India, Central Office Cell, Foreign Exchange Department, 6, Sansad Marg, New Delhi – 110 001 who shall process the applications in consultation with the Government of India, in the following cases:
a. The applicant is a citizen of or is registered/incorporated in Pakistan;
b. The applicant is a citizen of or is registered/incorporated in Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, Afghanistan, Iran, China, Hong Kong or Macau and the application is for opening a BO in Jammu and Kashmir, North East region and Andaman and Nicobar Islands;
c. The principal business of the applicant falls in the four sectors namely Defence, Telecom, Private Security and Information and Broadcasting. However, prior approval of RBI shall not be required in cases where Government approval or license/permission by the concerned Ministry/Regulator has already been granted.
d. The applicant is a Non-Government Organisation (NGO), Non-Profit Organisation, Body/ Agency/ Department of a foreign government. However, if such entity is engaged, partly or wholly, in any of the activities covered under Foreign Contribution (Regulation) Act, 2010 (FCRA), they shall obtain a certificate of registration under the said Act and shall not seek permission under FEMA 22.
The non-resident entity applying for a BO in India should have a financially sound track record of a profit making track record during the immediately preceding five financial years in the home country and net worth of not less than USD 100,000 or its equivalent.
Net Worth [total of paid-up capital and free reserves, less intangible assets as per the latest Audited Balance Sheet or Account Statement certified by a Certified Public Accountant or any Registered Accounts Practitioner by whatever name called].
An applicant that is not financially sound and is a subsidiary of another company may submit a Letter of Comfort (“LOC”) from its parent/ group company, subject to the condition that the parent/ group company satisfies the prescribed criteria for net worth and profit.
Procedure for setting up a BO
i. The application for establishing BO in India may be submitted by the non-resident entity in Form FNC to a designated AD Category – I bank (i.e. an AD Category – I bank identified by the applicant with whom they intend to pursue banking relations) along with the prescribed documents mentioned in the Form and the LOC, wherever applicable. The AD Category-I bank shall after exercising due diligence in respect of the applicant’s background, and satisfying itself as regards adherence to the eligibility criteria for establishing BO, antecedents of the promoter, nature and location of activity of the applicant, sources of funds, etc., and compliance with the extant KYC norms grant approval to the foreign entity for establishing BO in India.
ii. However, before issuing the approval letter to the applicant, the AD Category-I bank shall forward a copy of the Form FNC along with the details of the approval proposed to be granted by it to the General Manager, Reserve Bank of India, CO Cell, New Delhi, for allotment of Unique Identification Number (UIN) to each BO. After receipt of the UIN from RBI, the AD Category-I bank shall issue the approval letter to the non-resident entity for establishing BO in India.
iii. An applicant that has received a permission for setting up of a BO shall inform the designated AD Category I bank as to the date on which the BO has been set up. The AD Category I bank in turn shall inform RBI accordingly. The approval granted by the AD Category I bank should include a proviso to the effect that in case the BO for which approval has been granted is not opened within six months from the date of the approval letter, the approval shall lapse.
iv. All applications for establishing a BO in India by foreign banks and insurance companies will be directly received and examined by the Department of Banking Regulation (DBR), Reserve Bank of India, Central Office and the Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority (IRDA),
v. There is a general permission to non-resident companies for establishing BO in the Special Economic Zones (SEZs) to undertake manufacturing and service activities subject to the conditions that:
o such BOs are functioning in those sectors where 100% FDI is permitted;
o such BOs comply with Chapter XXII of the Companies Act, 2013; and
o such BOs function on a stand-alone basis.
vi. A BO may approach any AD Category-I bank in India to open an account for its operations in India. Credits to the account should represent the funds received from Head Office through normal banking channels for meeting the expenses of the office and any legitimate receivables arising in the process of its business operations. Debits to this account shall be for the expenses incurred by the BO and towards remittance of profit/winding up proceeds. Any foreign entity except an entity from Pakistan who has been awarded a contract for a project by the Government authority/Public Sector Undertakings or are permitted by the AD to operate in India may open a bank account without any prior approval of the Reserve Bank.
Annual Activity Certificate by BO
The Annual Activity Certificate (“AAC”) as at the end of March 31 each year along with the required documents needs to be submitted by the following:
a. In case of a sole BO, by the BO concerned;
b. In case of multiple BOs, a combined AAC in respect of all the offices in India by the nodal office of the BOs.
The BO needs to submit the AAC to the designated AD Category -I bank as well as Director General of Income Tax (International Taxation), New Delhi.
The designated AD Category – I bank shall scrutinize the AACs and ensure that the activities undertaken by the BO are being carried out in accordance with the terms and conditions of the approval given. In the event of any adverse findings reported by the auditor or noticed by the designated AD Category -I bank, the same should immediately be reported to the General Manager, Reserve Bank of India, CO Cell, New Delhi, along with the copy of the AAC and their comments thereon.
Registration with police authorities
Applicants from Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, Afghanistan, Iran, China, Hong Kong, Macau or Pakistan desirous of opening BO in India shall have to register with the state police authorities. Copy of approval letter for ‘persons’ from these countries shall be marked by the AD Category-I bank to the Ministry of Home Affairs, Internal Security Division-I, Government of India, New Delhi for necessary action and record.
Remittance of profit/surplus
BOs are permitted to remit outside India profit of the branch net of applicable Indian taxes, on production of the following documents to the satisfaction of the AD Category-I bank through whom the remittance is effected:
a. A certified copy of the audited balance sheet and profit and loss account for the relevant year.
b. A Chartered Accountant’s certificate certifying –
i. the manner of arriving at the remittable profit;
ii. that the entire remittable profit has been earned by undertaking the permitted activities; and
iii. that the profit does not include any profit on revaluation of the assets of the branch.
General Conditions
· BO is allowed to open non-interest-bearing current accounts in India. Such Offices are required to approach their AD for opening the accounts.
· A BO is required to register with the Registrar of Companies (ROCs) once it establishes a place of business in India under the Companies Act, 2013.
· The BOs shall obtain Permanent Account Number (PAN) from the Income Tax Authorities on setting up of their office in India and report the same in the AACs.
· Each BO is required to transact through one designated AD Category-I bank only who shall be responsible for the due diligence and KYC norms of the BO. BO, present in multiple locations, are required to transact through their designated AD.
· Acquisition of property by BO shall be governed by the guidelines issued under Foreign Exchange Management (Acquisition and transfer of immovable property outside India) Regulations.
· AD Category-I bank can allow term deposit account for a period not exceeding 6 months in favour of a BO provided the bank is satisfied that the term deposit is out of temporary surplus funds and the BO furnishes an undertaking that the maturity proceeds of the term deposit will be utilised for their business in India within 3 months of maturity.
Steps in brief There are two routes available under the FEMA 1999 for setting up the BO in India:
Reserve Bank Approval Route
Automatic Route
i. Designate a Bank and branch where the account will be opened (post approval of RBI) who will be an Authorized Dealer Bank (AD Bank) for BO in India.
ii. File an application for BO, with all necessary documents to the RBI through the AD Bank.
iii. Obtain approval of RBI.
iv. Apply to ROC to obtain a “Certificate of Establishment of Place of Business in India” within 30 days of approval by RBI.
v. Apply for Permanent Account Number with Income Tax Authority.
vi. Apply for TAN with Income Tax Authority.
vii. Open account with Bank and to obtain bank account number.
viii. Registration with police authorities if required.
FAQ’s
Q: Who can open a branch office in India?
A: Any foreign company can open a branch office in India provided it complies with Reserve Bank of India (RBI) guidelines.
Q: What is a branch office in India?
A: A branch office is an extension of a foreign company that carries out similar business activities as the parent company.
Q: What is branch office and examples?
A: The branch office is the extension of a parent company located outside India operating in India with similar business activities as that of the parent company. Examples of foreign companies having branch offices in India include Google India Private Limited, Microsoft India Private Limited, etc.
Q: How do you start a branch office?
A: To start a branch office, foreign companies need to apply to the RBI through an Authorized Dealer bank in Form FNC along with the required documents as mentioned in the RBI guidelines.
Q: What is the legal status of branch office?
A: The branch office does not have a separate legal status and is an extension of the foreign entity headquartered outside India.
Q: What is a branch office under Companies Act 2013?
A: Under Companies Act 2013, a branch office is considered as an establishment of a foreign company in India, and it requires registration with the Registrar of Companies (ROC).
Q: Is branch office a separate legal entity?
A: No, a branch office does not have a separate legal entity.
Q: How to open a branch office in another state?
A: The procedure for opening a branch in another state in India is the same as opening a branch office in India, and foreign companies must comply with RBI guidelines.
Q: Can a foreign company open a branch office in India?
A: Yes, foreign companies can open a branch office in India after getting permission from the RBI.
Q: What is the difference between head office and branch office?
A: The head office is the main administrative center and the place where major decisions are made, while a branch office is an extension of a head office located in another location, carrying out similar business activities as the parent company.
Q: What to consider when opening a new branch?
A: Before opening a new branch, companies should consider factors such as market demand, the location of the branch, competition, availability of talent, legal and regulatory compliance, and financial feasibility, among other things.
Software as a Service or SaaS is a cloud-based software delivery model that licenses applications on a subscription basis through the internet. It’s one of the three main types of cloud computing, along with platform as a service (PaaS) and infrastructure as a service (IaaS). Unlike traditional software, SaaS products do not require upfront purchases or underlying infrastructure maintenance.A software as a service agreement, or SaaS agreement, specifies the parameters of a software delivery framework. Under this kind of arrangement, users will access software and data via the internet from a central location. A software as a service (SaaS) agreement may have extensive service components, or it may only provide end customers with access to items that are already available for traditional licensing. With the SaaS approach, data is uploaded into a system and then saved on the cloud, negating the need for extra hardware or software.
In today’s technology industry, SaaS products have become widely prominent. Its features, including cost-effectiveness, greater flexibility, low risk, an increasing mobile workforce, and customers, have led to its widespread adoption across industries such as hospitality, education, healthcare, and wellness. The demand for SaaS products has led to a massive rise in startups dealing in SaaS products.
How is SAAS different from a License Agreement?
A licensing arrangement is not the same as a SaaS deal. A business would normally provide the actual software for usage via a licensing arrangement, usually in exchange for a one-time or ongoing charge. Hardware and software must be installed physically.
Contrarily, with a SaaS deal, clients receive cloud-based access to software and other technologies without exchanging any tangible commodities. End customers will get online access to the relevant items through a SaaS arrangement. Consequently, rather than authorizing product usage as a service, which would allow the licensee to install and execute the software on their own servers, the form of a SaaS agreement concentrates on allowing the use of a product, i.e., offering access to software housed remotely.
Components of a SAAS Contract
SaaS agreements serve a purpose when a business decides to license software rather than purchase it. In contrast to the conventional method, which sold software as a whole to an organization and installed it on servers on their premises, SaaS suppliers grant access to software and other technologies through public, private, or hybrid clouds. Although the nature, structure, and requirements of SaaS contracts are generally similar, the particular services, service level agreements, and obligations might differ depending on the technology or service being provided.
Difference between a SaaS company and a Software company
The main difference between a SaaS company and a software company is that a SaaS product is hosted on a cloud server, while the software is sold in a pre-packaged form. This technology eliminates the need for an end-user license to activate the software and any infrastructure to host the software. Instead, the SaaS company hosts its membership in the form of a subscription. The customer only needs to log into their account and get complete access. Any software company that leases its software through a central, cloud-based system is said to be a SaaS company. The basic distinguishing factor between a mainstream software company and a SaaS based company is the method of delivery.
SaaS Business Model and its Benefits
The SaaS business model is basically a delivery model and is not just about selling software but also being a full-fledged service provider. This involves not just selling the product but also customer retention for the foreseeable future.
SaaS companies can follow a Business to Business (B2B) approach or a Business to Customer (B2C) approach. In the B2B approach, the SaaS company sells its products and services to other companies, helping businesses operate more efficiently and effectively with highly automated technology. The B2C model focuses on individual customers, providing them ease of access to the software and products online, taking into account the exact user requirements.The SaaS business model offers several benefits, including cost-effectiveness, recurring revenue, and ease of maintenance. It also allows companies to optimize their sales, marketing, and customer care services to enhance performance and generate more revenue.For startups and small businesses, the SaaS business model is a cost-effective solution that eliminates the need for prompt customer support and various operating systems and devices. Instead, the product should only support different web browsers.
SAAS Terms and Conditions
A Terms and Conditions document for your SaaS application will help you better manage it while also reducing the reasons why users may file lawsuits against you. It is a legally significant document that every SaaS application should own. Having a Software as a Service (SaaS) Terms and Conditions agreement is crucial, regardless of how long your business has been in operation or if you’re a startup offering your first product.Legal conflicts may have been averted by those who do not have a Terms and Conditions agreement or who do not include the necessary terms.In addition to all the provisions found in regular Terms and Conditions agreements, SaaS terms and conditions agreements may contain additional sections or clauses specific to SaaS agreements.For instance, the majority of terms and conditions agreements include a section on acceptable behaviour on the website or app, copyright laws regarding content usage, and guidelines for suspending or cancelling a user’s account. Information about a SaaS’s licence agreement, reseller agreement, and subscription agreement may also be included in the Terms and Conditions document. A Service Level Agreement (SLA), which outlines the service level a customer may anticipate, the metrics used to assess it, and the potential remedies in the event that the firm falls short of these expectations, may also be included in some.
Negotiating a SAAS Contract
The topic of SaaS negotiation is seldom explored due to the fact that SaaS providers do not publicly promote their willingness to negotiate SaaS contracts. Instead, they utilise sales techniques to convince SaaS consumers that they’re receiving a fantastic deal, or they brag about pricing transparency on their websites. Negotiations are not limited to multi-year contracts at the corporate level. Small and medium-sized business SaaS purchasers have the option to bargain for specific conditions in their master services agreements, software licence agreements, and service level agreements (SLAs). Software negotiation strategies can be used to get improved support services, warranties, liability restrictions, and other pertinent contractual provisions.
White Label SAAS Agreement
The terms and conditions under which the provider offers the customer Software as a Service (SaaS) are outlined in a white label software agreement. It must to contain the supplier’s liability limitations and disclaimers about the SaaS solution. It also lays out the service level agreement that the supplier has promised to adhere to.
SAAS products and the Indian market
The Indian market is a great avenue for entrepreneurs to create a lucrative source of revenue by developing SaaS products. Indian entrepreneurs have competitive advantages over their global peers as they have access to a wide pool of skilled talent at a relatively lower cost. By 2025, the Indian SaaS market is projected to capture 8-9% of the global market and generate revenue of $30 billion.
The pandemic has also enhanced the need for software and tools that empower businesses by connecting and servicing customers, amidst physical limitations and being located in different parts of the world. SaaS is actively replacing other extraneous software segments like enterprise resource planning (ERP), customer relationship management (CRM), and point-of-sale (POS) systems.
A few examples of Indian SaaS companies include CleverTap, PingSafe, AppSecure, Zoho, WebEngage, Freshworks, Dukaan, and Talview.
Conclusion onDemystifying SaaS Agreements: A Concise Guide
A SaaS agreement is a roadmap for your journey with a cloud-based software service. It outlines the rights and responsibilities of both you (the customer) and the SaaS provider. Covering everything from payment terms and data security to service availability and user access, it ensures a smooth and mutually beneficial relationship.
SaaS Agreement/Contract/Software as a Service Agreement: These terms are interchangeable, representing the legal document governing your SaaS usage.
SaaS Agreement Template/Sample/Standard Agreement: These provide a starting point for drafting your agreement, often tailored to specific service types.
SaaS Terms and Conditions/License Agreement: These define the permitted uses and limitations of the software, often part of the broader agreement.
Negotiating SaaS Contracts: Don’t be afraid to discuss and adjust terms like pricing, support levels, and termination clauses to fit your needs.
SaaS Reseller Agreement: This enables you to resell the SaaS service to your own customers under specific conditions.
SaaS Service Level Agreement (SLA): This sets expectations for service uptime, performance, and support response times.
SaaS User Agreement/EULA: This outlines the acceptable use of the software for individual users within your organization.
Types of SaaS Contracts: Different terms might apply depending on your industry, service type, and business model (e.g., B2B, white-label).
SaaS License Types: These define the scope of your access and usage, such as per user, per feature, or by volume.
Templates and samples are helpful starting points, but customization is crucial.
Negotiating terms is often possible, so don’t hesitate to advocate for your interests.
By understanding these key terms and approaching agreements with clarity and awareness, you can navigate the world of SaaS with confidence and secure a contract that benefits both you and your chosen provider.
FAQs on Understanding SaaS Agreements:
What’s a SaaS Agreement?
A contract outlining service terms, responsibilities, and rights between you and a SaaS provider.
What do I need in a SaaS Agreement Template?
Essentials like payment terms, data privacy, service levels, warranties, and termination clauses.
Can I use a Free SaaS Agreement Template?
Use with caution! Consult a lawyer for complex needs or sensitive data.
Should I negotiate a SaaS Contract?
Yes! Discuss pricing, service levels, and specific needs to get a fair deal.
What are SaaS Reseller Agreements?
For reselling another company’s SaaS product under your brand.
What’s a SaaS Service Agreement Template?
Outlines specific service level guarantees and uptime commitments.
What are B2B SaaS Contract Templates?
Tailored for businesses, addressing data security, compliance, and liability.
What are SaaS Subscription Agreements?
Focus on payment terms, subscription tiers, and automatic renewals.
What are Standard SaaS Agreements?
Generic templates, often not suitable for complex situations.
What are SaaS License Types?
Per user, per feature, or concurrent user models, impacting pricing and access
A tax is a compulsory fee or financial charge levied by the government on the income, profits, occupation, property, transaction, etc. of the taxpayer. It is everyone’s contribution to the fund for making common public expenditures. Basically, taxes are a source of revenue to run the country for economic growth and development. Some also consider it as a transfer of wealth/ contribution from the rich to the poor betterment via the government.
TAXPAYER
Everyone who earns or gets an income in India is subject to income tax. But taxes are collected from those whose income is more than the basic exemption limits prescribed by the government. A taxpayer may be an individual, a partnership firm, a company, the government itself, and any other legal entity. He may or may not be a citizen of India and he may or may not be a resident of India.
TAXCOLLECTOR
The Ministry of Finance heads the Department of Revenue, which functions under the direction and control of the Revenue Secretary. He exercises control through two statutory bodies – the Central Board of Direct Taxes (“CBDT”) and the Central Board of Indirect Taxes and Customs (“CBIC”). There are many taxes levied by the state governments and local bodies also.
TYPES OF TAX
There are two groups of tax systems – progressive and regressive. Progressive is the one where the tax rate increases with the taxpayer’s income. While regressive is the one where the tax rate decreases with an increase in income. The former is beneficial for rich people. India follows the progressive tax system.
Direct Taxes
Direct taxes are collected from the person directly. Parliament passes the finance bill every year to give effect to any amendments proposed in the income tax law and to specify the rates of income tax for the purpose of self-assessment tax, advance tax, and tax deducted at source. Eg income tax, equalization levy, etc.
Indirect Taxes
Indirect taxes are the taxes that are imposed on goods and services. They are collected by the source that sells the product/ services thereby increasing the cost of the product/ services. eg. goods and services tax, excise and customs duty, securities transaction tax, commodities transaction tax, entertainment tax, etc.
As per the income tax act, the “total income” of the year of a person is charged to income tax. Certain deductions are allowed to be deducted from the total income, eg. investments to provident fund, the premium for life insurance and medical insurance, interest income from the savings bank, principle/ interest paid for a home loan and the education loan, etc. (all these are subject to provisions of the income tax laws).
“Total income” includes the income earned or received or accrued or arose in India or outside India depending on the residential status of the person and other provisions of the law to bring the taxability. The income tax act has not exhaustively defined the term income but extensively covered many types and sources of income.
Direct tax is divided into 5 main categories of income – salary income, income from house property, income from business/profession, capital gains, and income from other sources.
Exempt Income
Certain incomes are treated as exempt, which will not be included in the calculation of total income, eg. agriculture income, house rent allowance, the share of profit derived from partnership firm, gratuity, pension, the amount received under life insurance policy, etc. (all these are subject to provisions of the income tax laws). It is worth noting that exempt income has to be disclosed separately in the return though not under the income statement.
Don’t get confused between deductions and exempt income – deduction reduces total taxable income while exempt income is excluded from total taxable income.
RETURN OF INCOME
To ensure each person that there is a financial record of all the incomes, expenditures, losses, gains, losses, and taxes for each year, a return has to be filed by all those coming under the threshold limits. The return has to be filed annually for the period ranging between April to March i.e. Financial year.
Type of person
When to file*
Due Date*
Form*
Company
Always
31st October
ITR 6
Firm
Always
Non audit – 31 July Audit : Audit report – 30 September Return – 31 Oct
ITR 4 – having presumptive income ITR 5 – others
LLP
Always
Non audit – 31 July Audit : Audit report – 30 September Return – 31 Oct
ITR 5
Individual
If the total income exceeds the basic exemption limits
Non audit – 31 July Audit : Audit report – 30 September Return – 31 Oct
ITR 1 – not having business income and total income should be up to 50 Lakhs ITR 2 – not having business income ITR 3 – having business income TR 4 – having presumptive income
HUF
If the total income exceeds the basic exemption limits
Non audit – 31 July Audit : Audit report – 30 September Return – 31 Oct
ITR 2 – not having business income ITR 3 – having business income ITR 4 – having presumptive income
*unless amended/ otherwise notified by CBDT
Please note that the above table has been prepared based on generic detail and may subject to the addition/ deletion of any forms as prescribed by CBDT.
TAX AUDIT
Concept
Audit refers to the official inspection of an organization’s accounts and production of reports. Tax audit is an examination or review of accounts of business or profession carried out by taxpayers from an income tax point of view.
Audit is applicable to any person who:
Carries on business & sales, having turnover or gross receipts exceeds INR 1 Cr for the financial year. Subsequently, the limit has been increased to 5 Cr and recently in budget’21 to 10 Cr subject to certain conditions.
Simply put – If your turnover exceeds 1 Cr/ 10 Cr as the case may be, have a look at the applicability.
Carries on profession, having gross receipts exceeds INR 50 Lakhs for the financial year.
Taxpayer carrying on business or profession & income declared is less than 8% or 6% (i.e. not following presumptive taxation).
Accounts have to be audited by a prescribed accountant within the due dates specified above in form 3CA/3CB and Form 3CD.
PRESUMPTIVE TAXATION
Concept
Presumptive taxation scheme was introduced to give relief to small taxpayers from the tedious work of maintenance of books of accounts. They can compute income on an estimated basis at the rates prescribed.
Income
Applicable to
Threshold limit
Prescribed rate
Business income
Individuals, HUF, partnership firm
Less than 2 Cr of sale or turnover or gross receipts
6% for digital transactions. For others receipts – 8%
Professional income
Professionals
Less than 50 Lakhs of gross receipts
50% of gross receipts
Once the rates are applied, no other expense can be claimed. The income so generated shall be treated as final income from that business/profession.
Tax Deducted at Source (“TDS”)
Concept
We all love EMIs and so does our government. TDS is one such system that enables us to pay tax on the income as and when we earn it. It is not feasible to pay a large amount in one go and hence it is convenient for the taxpayers as the tax gets deducted automatically. It is one of the steadiest forms of revenue for the government. Tax is withheld at the source (called the deductor) and whose tax is withheld (the deductee) can claim such taxes paid in his return of income.
Example
Nisha works for an organization named TLC. TLC will collect all the income and investment declarations and will accordingly compute and deduct tax as per slab rates while paying the monthly salary. Nisha can claim this deducted tax at the time of preparing her return of income.
Kunal has given one of his commercial properties on rent to M/s. Sharma Enterprises. The firm shall deduct tax from the rent which is to be paid to Kunal and pay the net rent.
Rates of TDS are :
Individuals and HUF shall deduct TDS only if a tax audit is applicable to them. Others shall always deduct TDS if the threshold is crossed.
Threshold limit – INR 2.4 Lakhs Plant & machinery – 2% Land and building or furniture – 10%
Professional services
Threshold limit – INR 30,000 – 10%
#unless amended/ notified by CBDT.
TDS Return
The deductor is responsible to pay the taxes deducted to the government on a monthly basis and also file a compulsory quarterly return. A Tax deduction and collection number (TAN) has to be obtained by the deductor for itself and has to be quoted in the TDS return. The payee (deductee) has to provide his PAN, if the PAN is not provided then the deductor shall deduct tax at the higher rate of 20% (reduced to 5%).
Know Your Taxes (Basics)
TDS Return
Form
TDS for salaries
Form 24Q
TDS for payments other than salaries
Form 26Q
Tax collected at source
Form 27EQ
TDS Certificate
Every person deducting tax at source is required to furnish a certificate to the payee to the effect that tax has been deducted along with certain other particulars. This certificate is usually called the TDS certificate. Individuals are advised to request for a TDS certificate wherever applicable.
To view how much of your TDS is deducted for a year, a Form 26AS can be downloaded from the e-filing website. The TDS reflected here can be claimed in the return.
Lower deduction of TDS
If the assessee (other than company or firm) is sure that there is no taxable income for the year, he can submit a self-declaration form (Form 15G or 15H) to the deductor stating that his taxable income is less than the basic exemption limit and so not to deduct TDS on the payment.
If the assessee (everyone) is of the opinion that he would not be paying any tax for the year owing to losses or exemptions or that his yearly tax is going to be less than the total TDS deducted, then he shall make an application for lower or no TDS before the assessing officer (AO) in Form 13. The AO shall assess the application and if satisfied shall grant the permission. This permission letter has to be given to the vendor and shall remain valid for a period as specified by the AO.
These forms also reduce the hassle for claiming refunds every year.
ADVANCE TAX
Concept
It is the “pay-as-you-earn” scheme of the government. The assessee has to pay part of their taxes before the end of the year. The difference between advance tax and TDS is that advance tax is collected from the taxpayer itself whereas TDS is collected from the payee itself.
Monetary limit & Payment
Once the tax amount exceeds INR 10,000, the assessee has to pay advance tax. It applies to all taxpayers excluding those above 60 years of age who have no business income. It is calculated as per normal total income and tax calculations but on an estimated basis and divided as per the following schedule:
Advance Tax
Due Date
15% of advance tax
15th June
45% of advance tax minus already paid
15th September
75% of advance tax minus already paid
15th December
100% of advance tax minus already paid
15th March
However, all taxes paid before 31st March are considered as advance tax. Those having incomes as per presumptive taxation have to deposit the whole advance tax on 15th March. Non-payment or short payment leads to interest charges.
SELF ASSESSMENT TAX
What all tax is left to be paid after TDS and advance tax is self-assessment tax. This is before filing the return of income and after considering all the actual incomes, gains, and deductions of the year on a self computation basis.
Like advance tax, this tax is also directly paid by the assessee but there is no specific due date for the same. Just that it should be on or before filing the return.
BELATED RETURN
If you miss filing your return on the original due date, it can be filed anytime before 31st December of next FY (unless notified by CBDT). But the losses cannot be carried forward to next year (except house property loss). The maximum fine to file a belated return is INR 10,000.
REVISED RETURN
If you have made any mistake in the original return, it can be revised, provided the original one was filed at the right time. Revised return can be filed before 31st December or before your assessment of income is completed (if conducted), whichever occurs earlier (unless notified by CBDT).
ASSESSMENT OF INCOME
Concept
After filing an income tax return, a tax officer may be assigned by the Income Tax department randomly based on certain criteria to undertake an examination. If a taxpayer is selected for scrutiny assessment, the Assessment Officer would issue an income tax notice to the taxpayer for the same.
Notice
Further, the tax officer would request certain information, documents and book of accounts for undertaking the scrutiny assessment. On producing the information and documents requested, the income tax officer would complete an assessment and compute the amount of income and tax payable by the taxpayer.
Appeal
If there is any mismatch in the amount of taxable income or taxes to be paid, the taxpayer could agree with the order passed by the Officer and pay the demand or accept any amount of refund, or loss as determined by the tax officer. Or if not acceptable then file an appeal before the Commissioner (Appeals), further to Tribunal, High Court, and Supreme Court.
EQUALISATION LEVY
Concept
“Whole world is a market place”. It is the era of growing digitalization where everything happens without any physical presence and hence it becomes important for businesses to expand globally. Governments have tax laws to bring under its ambit even the advertisements and marketing income from the overseas market.
equalisation levy is the Indian version to tax the non-residents receiving such online advertising income from resident Indian businesses.
Further, budget’20 has introduced a new equalisation levy to tax the non-resident e-commerce operators.
Example
M/s Infotainment Pvt Ltd paid USD 7,000 to Facebook. The company need to deduct an equalisation levy @ 6% while making payments to Facebook.
Monetary Limits & Return
Old equalisation levy –
The aggregate amount of services rendered by the non-resident to one party should exceed INR 1 Lakh to trigger the levy. It is an indirect tax whereby the payer (Indian) has to deduct tax @ 6% while paying to the service provider (non-Indian).
New equalisation levy –
The aggregate amount of gross receipts/ turnover of such non-resident e-commerce operators from online sales of goods or services should be INR 2 crores in a year to trigger the levy. It is a tax whereby the e-commerce operator (non-Indian) has to collect tax @ 2% on consideration received from the service provider (Indian).
The above practice of tax deduction is followed by paying the tax to the central government and return filing (Form 1) on or before 30 June of the relevant year.
Saving tax money is a crucial aspect of running a profitable business. However, not all entrepreneurs are familiar with the tax provisions and available tax-saving strategies. By introducing tax efficiencies in their financial planning, startups and other businesses can save money and resources that can be used for growth.
Here are some tax efficiency strategies for businesses, including startups, to reduce their overall tax liability and maximize earnings:
1. Proper Book Keeping
Keeping accurate financial records is paramount to managing business expenses properly. Many business expenses are tax-deductible, so keeping detailed financial statements and receipts will help you to claim all eligible tax deductions and credits.
2. Registration Under Start-Up India Initiative
Start-ups that are registered under the Start-Up India program are eligible for various tax benefits such as tax holidays, angel tax exemption, and more. By taking advantage of this initiative, startups can save money on taxes and allocate those resources to other areas of their business.
3. Donations and Charity
Donations made to registered charities and funds are tax-deductible. Giving back to the community not only earns goodwill but can also attract tax benefits. So, consider donating to a registered charity or fund to help your community while also saving money on taxes.
4. Plan Your Investments
Consider investing in tax saving schemes or SIPs. These investment accounts offer tax benefits that can help you save money and also prepare for your retirement.
5. Correct Deduction of Taxes at Source
Non-deduction of taxes could lead to the disallowance of the entire expense or part thereof for tax purposes. Hence, ensure you’re deducting taxes, where applicable, and at the correct rates in force to avoid any tax disallowance or tax penalty.
6. Depreciation
Manufacturing companies can avail of additional tax benefits by claiming depreciation on the purchase of new plants & machinery. Make sure to keep accurate records of all capital expenditures to claim these deductions.
By adopting these tax efficiency strategies, businesses, including startups, can save a considerable amount of money on taxes each year, which can be used to reinvest and grow their business. With proper financial planning, businesses can avoid unnecessary expenses and maximize their earnings potential.
FAQs
Q: What is the importance of proper bookkeeping for tax efficiency in businesses?
A: Proper bookkeeping is crucial for tax efficiency as it allows businesses to keep accurate financial records, enabling them to claim all eligible tax deductions and credits. This helps reduce their overall tax liability and maximize earnings.
Q: How can startups benefit from registering under the Start-Up India initiative?
A: Start-ups registered under the Start-Up India program are eligible for various tax benefits, including tax holidays and angel tax exemption. By taking advantage of these incentives, startups can save money on taxes and allocate those resources to other areas of their business.
Q: Can donations and charity contribute to tax savings for businesses?
A: Yes, donations made to registered charities and funds are tax-deductible. By donating to a registered charity or fund, businesses can both support their community and save money on taxes.
Q: How can planning investments help in tax savings for businesses?
A: Planning investments in tax-saving schemes or Systematic Investment Plans (SIPs) can provide businesses with tax benefits. These schemes not only help save money on taxes but also assist in preparing for retirement.
Q: Why is correct deduction of taxes at source important for businesses?
A: Correctly deducting taxes at source is crucial to avoid disallowance of expenses or tax penalties. Non-deduction of taxes could lead to the disallowance of the entire expense or part thereof for tax purposes.
Q: How can manufacturing companies benefit from claiming depreciation on new plants and machinery?
A: Manufacturing companies can avail additional tax benefits by claiming depreciation on the purchase of new plants and machinery. Keeping accurate records of capital expenditures is essential to claim these deductions.
Regulators position – primary breach of S 42 (Issue of Shares on Private Placement basis) of CA, 2013
Extract of S 42(7) of the CA, 2013: “(7) No company issuing securities under this section shall release any public advertisements or utilize any media, marketing or distribution channels or agents to inform the public at large about such an issue.”
“S 42 of the Act clearly provides that the private placement shall be made to a select group of persons who have been identified by the Board. The number of such persons cannot exceed 200 (prescribed in the rules). The Explanation I. to S 42(3) makes it very clear that the process of “private placement” covers: • the offer or • invitation to subscribe or • issue of
securities to a select group of persons by a company (other than by way of public offer) through private placement offer-cum-application, which satisfies the conditions specified in the section.
”In summary – the concept of the term ‘private placement’ stands for the fact that the company is identifying a certain set of parties to whom it wants to offer its securities rather than making any kind of public offer which generally happens in the case of listed companies. Private is construed as 200 people.
TYKE + Company’s position
“Tyke provides value added services in the form of facilitation of connecting like-minded people. Community with start-ups. Tyke also provides the verification of KYC, identification of KYC of people who have shown interest to invest in the company.”
“The Companies have only availed the value added services (VAS) which is provided by the Tyke platform.”
In summary – Tyke calls itself like a ‘community of like minded people and startups’ where the startup is leveraging on the community to raise investments and TYKE acts as a facilitator for the investment once the proposed investor and startup agree.
Our thoughts!
In the era of Shark Tank, every individual aspires to be a ‘shark’ and wants to participate in the startup ecosystem and ride the wave. TYKE serves as a great platform to provide access to both startups and retail investors for raising money and to invest money in startups respectively. In the USA, for example, this is considered as a high risk asset class and hence there are restrictions on the annual investment amount for regular investors other than ‘accredited investor’. Keeping this in mind, in the current scenario, despite all the explanations given by Tyke and the Company, the regulator primarily points out to the intent of the law where private placement (fundraise) cannot be published in open markets to solicit any investments through communities, etc
Over the recent years, cashless payments have become one of the preferred modes of retail transaction in India – particularly in urban markets. Unified Payments Interface (UPI) has allowed users to link their mobile phone numbers to their bank accounts since 2016. That’s made transferring and receiving money via apps as easy as sending a text message, at a minimal cost. With several payment apps to choose from and a quick and simple interface, the popularity of UPI has soared.
However, as the traffic builds, it’s getting riskier to depend on just one system. During the pandemic, with people spending more time at home and relying on the internet for shopping and entertainment, there’s been a rising incidence of internet fraud and cyber-crimes. To address the “risk concentration” of only one platform and offer consumers more options, the Reserve Bank of India in 2020 invited private companies to bid for a license to set up new platforms or pan-India umbrella entities to boost the retail payment in the country. These entities are otherwise known as New Umbrella Entities or NUEs.
What is an NUE & Why is RBI Introducing It?
At present, only the National Payments Council of India (NPCI), an umbrella organisation set up by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) and the Indian Banks’ Association and incorporated as a not-for-profit entity, supports various payment systems, including RuPay, UPI and National Automated Clearing House, which manage inter-bank transfers. Players in the payments space have indicated the various pitfalls of NPCI being the only entity managing all of the retail payments systems in India.
The concerns regarding the systemic risk arising from concentrating operations of a significant portion of retail payments in one entity had been on the radar of the RBI for quite some time now and coupled with the pressure to open up the sector for competition from private players, the RBI has now put in place a regulatory framework that allows private players to establish and operate retail payments systems that enables fund-transfer and merchant payment systems.
The RBI’s move is aimed at developing a network parallel to NPCI, which can maintain interoperability with services such as UPI yet foster innovation and inclusion in the payments space offering more retail payment solutions to customers along with expanding the competitive landscape in this area.
How is NUE Different from NPCI?
NUEs will be for-profit (could also be registered as a Section 8 company under the Companies Act, 2013 as may be decided by it) and will be allowed to charge fees for transactions, unlike NPCI. They will be able to earn interest from the float that customers maintain in their online shopping accounts.
According to RBI Guidelines, the NUE licence would give companies the opportunity to set up, manage and operate ATMs, White Label PoS, Aadhaar-based payments and remittance services, develop new payment methods, standards and technologies and monitor related issues in the country and internationally.
RBI will authorize these NUEs under section 4 of the Payment and Settlement Systems Act, 2007.
Eligibility & Who Can Apply for NUE?
All entities owned and controlled by resident Indian citizens (as defined under FEMA rules) with at least three years of experience in the payment ecosystem as a Payment System Operator (PSO), Payment Service Provider (PSP) or Technology Service Provider (TSP) can apply for NUE.
Promoter: Any entity holding more than 25% of the paid-up capital of the NUE shall be deemed to be a promoter. A promoter will hold at least 25% and up to 40% in the operator and must be an Indian resident.
In case of Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) / Foreign Portfolio Investor (FPI): The applicant entity should –
Comply with the FDI policy and guidelines of the Indian government
Comply with capital requirements as per FEMA rules / regulations
Comply with corporate governance norms issued by RBI
Obtain RBI’s approval for the appointment of board members.
RBI’s fit and proper criteria for applicant entity and promoter – Should have a track record of financial integrity, good reputation & character and honesty. Such a person should not be convicted by a court for any economic offence or any offence under RBI laws; should not be declared insolvent and not discharged; should not be financially unsound or of an unsound mind.
Capital & Governance Requirements for NUE
At the time of application:
The entity, applying for NUE, should have a minimum paid-up capital of INR 500 crore.
The promoter should be able to demonstrate a capital contribution of at least 10% i.e. INR 50 crore at the time of application (to be further increased to at least 25% at the time of commencement of business)
A single promoter or group cannot hold more than 40% investment in the capital of the NUE.
Foreign companies can own a maximum 25% and are therefore teaming up with local players.
Subsequently
A minimum net worth of INR 300 crore should be maintained at all times.
The promoter/promoter group shareholding can be diluted to a minimum of 25% after 5 years of commencement of the business.
Latest Updates on NUE Licensing by RBI (2024)
The Reserve Bank retains the right to approve the appointment of Directors as also to nominate a member on the Board of the New umbrella entity.
The Application Process
Once an entity applies for the license of NUE, a scrutiny of applications will be undertaken by an External Advisory Committee (EAC). The EAC will submit its recommendations to the RBI. Board for Regulation and Supervision of Payment and Settlement Systems (BPSS) will be the final authority on issuing authorization for setting up the NUE. This whole process should tentatively be completed within a period of six months.
Who had applied for NUE license and Recent Developments?
Six groups have applied for the NUE licence, for which the deadline was March 31, 2021:
A consortium consisting of Amazon, Visa Inc., Indian private lenders ICICI Bank Ltd and Axis Bank, and two financial-services startups, Pine Labs and BillDesk
Another group is led by Reliance Industries, partnering with Facebook and Alphabet Inc.’s Google
Paytm has joined with ride-hailing startup Ola, IndusInd Bank Policy Bazaar among others
The Tata Group has combined forces with Mastercard Inc., Airtel Digitel and two Indian banks, HDFC and Kotak
Financial Software and Systems is applying with India Post Payments Bank Ltd., RazorPay and others
U.S.based payments firm FIS joined with Union Bank of India and Punjab National Bank
However, the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) has put on hold licensing of the New Umbrella Entity (NUE) network, a fintech institution planned as a rival to National Payments Corporation of India (NPCI).
All the applications for the NUE licence were submitted in March-April 2021, but there has been no communication from the RBI after that, reason being none of the applicants have proposed anything novel or a great technology breakthrough that would have made RBI happy and all applicants plans were similar to the model of NPCI.
Hence, the regulator would not permit any of the six consortiums to open for operation since they have all failed to live up to the RBI’s standards.
Will NUEs Replace NPCI?
NUEs will not replace but complement NPCI in taking India’s digital payment success story to new heights. RBI’s decision to allow fintechs and payment companies like Visa and Mastercard to process NEFT and RTGS payments is a step towards creating an enabling environment for NUEs to succeed.
FAQs on New Umbrella Entity (NUE)
Q: What is a New Umbrella Entity (NUE) in India? A: A New Umbrella Entity (NUE) in India is a private entity that operates and manages payment systems like UPI (Unified Payments Interface), which was previously managed by the National Payments Corporation of India (NPCI). The NUE aims to foster competition, innovation, and enhance the efficiency of India’s digital payments ecosystem.
Q: Why did the RBI introduce NUEs? A: The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) introduced NUEs to promote competition and innovation in the payment systems market. This move aims to reduce dependency on a single entity (NPCI) and encourage diverse players, including fintech companies and banks, to enhance the quality and security of digital payment services.
Q: How does an NUE work? A: An NUE operates by managing, promoting, and overseeing payment infrastructure like UPI, mobile wallets, and other financial transactions. It ensures the interoperability of digital payment systems, sets up the technical framework, and works towards improving the efficiency and accessibility of digital payments.
Q: Is NUE different from NPCI? A: Yes, NUE is different from NPCI. While NPCI is a non-profit organization that has been the backbone of India’s digital payment systems, NUE is a private entity that will oversee a broader range of payment systems. NUE will foster greater competition, innovation, and offer more advanced solutions compared to NPCI’s existing model.
Q: Who is eligible to apply for an NUE license? A: Eligibility to apply for an NUE license includes entities that have experience in payment systems, technology infrastructure, and financial operations. Eligible applicants include private entities, consortiums of banks, fintech companies, and tech-driven financial service providers with sufficient resources and expertise.
Q: What is the minimum capital requirement for an NUE license? A: The minimum capital requirement for an NUE license is ₹500 crore. This ensures that the applicant has the financial resources to build and maintain a reliable and secure payment system infrastructure.
Q: Can foreign companies apply for NUE? A: Yes, foreign companies can apply for an NUE license in India, provided they meet the eligibility criteria outlined by the RBI. However, they must adhere to the RBI’s regulations and India’s financial sector policies.
Q: How long does it take to get an NUE license from RBI? A: The process to obtain an NUE license from the RBI can take several months. The RBI evaluates each application thoroughly, assessing the financial, technical, and operational capabilities of the applicant before granting approval.
Q: How will NUEs benefit India’s digital payments ecosystem? A: NUEs will bring in more competition, leading to innovative products, better security, and enhanced services. They will improve the efficiency of digital payments, reduce costs, and encourage more players to enter the market, benefiting both consumers and businesses.
Q: Will NUEs replace NPCI? A: No, NUEs will not replace NPCI. Instead, NUEs will coexist with NPCI and offer competition in managing payment systems like UPI. The intention is to provide greater choices and improve the digital payments landscape.
Q: Can NUEs operate UPI payments like NPCI? A: Yes, NUEs can operate UPI payments, similar to NPCI, if granted the necessary licenses. However, the RBI’s regulatory framework ensures that NUEs will adhere to the same high standards for security and interoperability as NPCI.
Q: How does NUE impact businesses and banks? A: NUEs will provide businesses and banks with more options for digital payment solutions, which will lead to enhanced service offerings, improved competition, and reduced costs. This will further drive innovation and enable businesses to offer more secure and efficient payment methods to their customers.
Q: What are RBI’s regulatory requirements for NUEs? A: RBI’s regulatory requirements for NUEs include compliance with strict capital requirements, technical standards, cybersecurity protocols, and adherence to customer protection norms. NUEs must also ensure the interoperability of their systems with existing payment platforms and maintain transparency in operations.
Q: Why has RBI put NUE licensing on hold? A: RBI paused NUE licensing due to concerns over market competition and the potential for monopolies. The central bank is reviewing its approach to ensure that NUEs will not disrupt the existing payment infrastructure and that they operate in line with regulatory goals.
Q: Can an NUE consortium include banks and fintech companies? A: Yes, an NUE consortium can include banks, fintech companies, and other financial service providers. This collaboration enables sharing of expertise, resources, and technological infrastructure, which can lead to more robust payment systems.
Q: Which companies applied for an NUE license? A: Some of the notable companies that have applied for an NUE license include large private banks, fintech firms, and technology companies. These applicants have experience in payment systems and technology infrastructure and are looking to contribute to India’s digital payment revolution.
Q: What is the latest update on NUEs in 2024? A: As of 2024, the RBI has yet to release new guidelines or grant NUE licenses. However, it continues to assess applications and is expected to reopen the licensing process once its concerns about market competition and system stability are addressed.
Q: Will RBI relaunch the NUE licensing process? A: It is anticipated that the RBI will eventually relaunch the NUE licensing process, but the timeline remains uncertain. The RBI is likely to resume issuing licenses after refining the regulatory framework and ensuring that the payment system remains secure and efficient.
Q: How will NUEs affect UPI transactions for customers? A: NUEs are expected to bring more competition to the UPI ecosystem, potentially offering new features, enhanced security, and faster transaction processing. For customers, this means improved user experiences and access to a broader range of payment options.
Q: What security measures will NUEs implement? A: NUEs will be required to implement robust security measures, including end-to-end encryption, fraud detection systems, and compliance with RBI’s cybersecurity protocols. These measures will ensure the integrity and safety of digital transactions for users and businesses alike.
What’s the connection between NBA legend Shaquille O Neal, tennis star Serena Williams, former Facebook executive and Silicon Valley investor Chamath Palihapitiya, and Indian media veteran Uday Shankar? SPACs!
What are SPACs and how do they work?
SPAC or Special Purpose Acquisition Company is a company without commercial operations listed on a stock exchange by an experienced management team or an individual with an investment pedigree (known as the Sponsor) with the sole purpose of acquiring or buying out a private company, thus making it public without going through traditional IPO. At times, SPACs are also referred to as blank check companies.
The private company being targeted is not known at the start, although the Sponsors could indicate the geography/sector they are interested in investing.
For the purpose of this acquisition, the SPAC needs money which is raised through the process of IPO. The IPO’s success solely depends on the faith that the investors have in the Sponsors, since the company has no business / financial performance to speak of. SPACs seek underwriters and institutional investors before offering shares to the public. During IPO, investors are allotted units which comprise of shares along with fractional warrants (SPAC warrants are options given to the warrant holder to buy the shares of the company at a predetermined price on a future date, subject to certain terms and conditions relating to the exercising) that offer them an upside and act as a deal sweetener. The capital raised through the IPO is placed in an interest-bearing trust account until the target company is identified.
A SPAC has about two years to discover this target and complete a reverse merger. If the SPAC fails to find a suitable target and complete the process, it gets delisted, liquidated and the entire money kept in the escrow account (along with interest less any taxes/bank fees) is refunded to all the investors. If the target is identified within 2 years, then post the approval of the proposed acquisition by SPAC investors, the SPAC and the target combine to form a publicly traded operating company, leading to an automatic listing of the acquired private company.
Note – If the SPAC investor is not comfortable with a planned purchase, he/she has the option to sell the shares and exit, but can keep the warrants. These warrants give you an additional upside if the SPAC is successful and goes better than expected.
The deal value of the acquisition could be four to five times higher than funds raised by the SPAC. The difference is met through fresh investments, mainly in the form of Private Investment in Public Equity (PIPE) deals. At the time of a public listing, large private equity and hedge funds can directly invest in and acquire shares of a company at share price or at a discount without going through the stock markets. The funds get access to non-public information on the potential target company from the SPAC after signing a NDA and get the option to invest at the time of the merger.
SPACs – why prefer them over traditional IPOs?
SPACs are considered a safe bet during choppy markets and the global outbreak of COVID-19 has played a major role in its popularity.
Traditional IPOs are seen to be expensive and far more time consuming in terms of registrations, disclosures and processes. SPACs involve lesser parties, lesser negotiations and are perceived to offer a faster and flexible route for venture capital funds and private equity majors to take their private companies public.
A regular IPO involves a list of procedures prior to actual listing – doing roadshows, convincing a wide variety of investors regarding future business prospects, deriving optimum valuation for the business etc. All these activities take time and are fraught with uncertainties. This is where SPAC has an advantage. With SPAC already listed, half the work is done. Also, the negotiation works faster since only one party has to be convinced.
SPACs work even better for startups – since most successful SPACs are run by experienced business investors, young companies can benefit from that investment expertise and not have to worry too much about swinging investment amounts or shifting negotiations. Broader market sentiment matters less since the SPAC investors commit to the purchase, sometimes allowing companies to remain truer to their original mission statement or purpose than if they were purchased by a larger board of investors.
Off late a majority of the SPACs have sponsored startups and companies that are pushing the boundaries of tech and are innovative. Being an investor in a SPAC gives funds and individuals the opportunity to potentially become an investor in such cutting-edge companies
What’s in it for the Sponsors and Investors?
For the sponsor, though they are not entitled to any remuneration during the process of raising funds and acquiring the target company, the substantial Founder shares and warrants are incredibly valuable. It is not every day that you get to own 20% of a company for $25,000.
For investors, SPACs make for a safe bet because their funds are parked in an interest bearing trust account until the merger. In many cases, the investors in a SPAC sell their shares before the merger or at the time of the merger and are able to make good profits
SPACs – Picking up steam
It is the sheer volume of dry powder sitting with investors – $2.5 trillion globally – that’s making SPACs quite popular. Also, SPACs offer a simplified path to taking a company public and to access the public markets for both investors and private companies.
Over the last 10 years, SPAC has been gradually gaining traction in the US markets. In 2020, SPAC was used as a listing option for every alternate transaction, i.e. 50 per cent of the transactions were done through SPACs. As much as $83 billion was raised.
In India, SPAC structure deals are not entirely new. For instance, in 2015, Silver Eagle Acquisition, a SPAC acquired a 30 percent stake in Videocon d2h for around $200 Mn. In 2016, Yatra Online, the parent company of Yatra India, listed on NASDAQ, by way of a reverse-merger with another US-based SPAC, Terrapin 3 Acquisition. The deal size was around $219 million.
Due to the increased scrutiny of US SPACs by the US SEC, companies are running low on targets in North America and as a result Asia is getting attention.
SPACs for Indian Investors
SPACs cannot be listed in India due to various rules and regulations around shell companies and the general myth that these companies are formed for money laundering activities
However, considering India’s large and mature IPO market and the fact that India is the third largest startup ecosystem in the world, regulators should consider allowing SPAC listing in India – with the necessary regulatory oversight in place. It is understandable that there may be some skepticism around the risks associated with SPACs, but the advantages that they bring to the table are priceless for investors.
Current Indian laws will have to be modified to bifurcate a shell company from a SPAC. Since SPACs are increasingly getting noticed by Indian investors they will hopefully also get noticed by lawmakers and regulators and they will make the required amendments in laws to gain from this SPAC boom.
Recent developments in India:
To keep with pace with the evolving market environment, International Financial Services Centres Authority (IFSCA), the unified regulator of IFSC at GIFT city, India, is now proposing a suitable framework for capital raising and listing of SPAC on the recognised stock exchanges in International Financial Services Centres (IFSCs).
The proposed salient features of the IFSCA framework for listing of SPACs are as follows:
Offer size of not less than $50 million or any other amount as may be specified by the Authority from time to time.
The sponsor would have to hold at least 20% of the post issue, paid-up capital
The minimum application size in an initial public offer of SPAC shall be $250,000
A minimum subscription of at least 75% of the offer size has been stipulated
SEBI has told the Parliamentary Standing Committee on Finance that it was deliberating on the framework of SPACs in Indian capital markets and a committee, which was set-up to look into it, is in the process of finalising its report.
What’s the bottom line?
Fancy packaging does not make it less risky to write out blank cheques. The magnitude of costs and risks involved around SPACs is high.
The SPAC structure lends itself to heavy dilution of share value, through shares allocated to the Sponsor, the options investors have to redeem shares without surrendering warrants, and the underwriting fees based on IPO proceeds. This in effect impacts the actual value of the SPAC shares at the time of the merger, further affecting the deal value and could result in lower share prices post-merger.
Considering a large number of SPACs being launched and allegations against some of them, there is rising scrutiny. There are calls for better disclosures and greater checks on Sponsors so they have more responsibility towards investors. The increased competition among SPAC Sponsors for investor money is also resulting in more equitable structuring, ensuring Sponsors do not have an extraordinary advantage over late investors.
With elements of high risk and the potential for spectacular windfalls, investors should be very mindful while giving in to the SPAC buzz.
E-commerce has revolutionized the way businesses operate, not just in India but around the world. It is a business model that enables firms to conduct business over an electronic network, typically the internet. E-commerce operates in all four major market segments: B2B, B2C, C2C, and C2B. The ease and convenience of conducting commercial transactions over the internet have led to the rapid popularity and acceptance of e-commerce worldwide.
Here are some frequently asked questions about e-commerce in India:
What are the benefits of starting an e-commerce business in India? – The government of India has been promoting e-commerce initiatives such as Startup India, Digital India, allocating funds for the BharatNet Project, and promoting a cashless economy. Registering an e-commerce business in India is a fairly open space, with no entry barriers imposed on domestic and foreign direct investment.
What are the steps to start an e-commerce business in India? – The most basic step is to create a business plan designed according to market research, financial budget, and profit margin. Next, register the business for tax compliance and establish a payment gateway on the website. It is also mandatory to register with the Shops and Establishment Act, 1948 and the Employees State Insurance Act, 1948, if applicable. Finally, registration for domain name, Microsoft software licenses, and other software licenses is also needed.
What are the benefits of MSME registration for e-commerce businesses? – MSME registration comes with its own set of benefits and is required for any e-commerce business falling within the limits of maximum investment for service providers to be INR 100 crore to appropriately register under MSME.
What are the legal compliances needed for setting up an e-commerce business in India? – Legal compliances include registration for tax compliance, payment gateway establishment, registration for licenses such as the Shops and Establishment Act, 1948, Employees State Insurance Act, 1948, and registering the business for domain name and software licenses.
FAQs about Setting up E-commerce Business in India
What is FDI in e-commerce?
FDI (Foreign Direct Investment) in e-commerce refers to the investment made by a foreign company in an Indian e-commerce business. The government has formulated certain guidelines and regulations that govern FDI in India’s e-commerce industry.
Is FDI allowed in inventory-based e-commerce models?
No, FDI is not permitted in the inventory-based model of e-commerce.
What are the conditions that e-commerce entities need to fulfill?
E-commerce entities must follow specific conditions, such as not directly or indirectly influencing the sale price of goods or services and not exercising ownership or control over the inventory beyond a particular limit.
Who is responsible for post-sales services and customer satisfaction in e-commerce?
The responsibility for post-sales services and customer satisfaction lies with the seller, as mentioned in the FDI guidelines.
Can entities with equity participation or control over inventory sell their products on the marketplace run by the marketplace entity?
No, entities with equity participation or control over inventory cannot sell their products on the platform run by the marketplace entity.
What consumer protection measures are emphasised in the e-commerce policy?
Genuine reviews and ratings, anti-counterfeiting and privacy measures, and e-courts for grievance redressal are some of the consumer protection measures highlighted in the draft e-commerce policy.
What is the emphasis on Made-In-India in e-commerce?
The Indian government intends to promote the Made-In-India initiative by allowing foreign MNCs to invest in Indian e-commerce companies that hold inventory, with a condition that 100% of the products in the inventory must be Made In India.
Are foreign companies allowed to operate e-commerce businesses in India?
Foreign companies are allowed to operate e-commerce businesses in India, subject to compliance with Indian laws and regulations.
Incorporating a business involves several important decisions, including the choice of a business vehicle. Two popular vehicles are Limited Liability Partnerships (LLPs) and Private Limited Companies. This article aims to help founders choose between these two vehicles by providing a comparison chart that outlines the characteristics of each. Although the article doesn’t provide a definitive answer as to which vehicle is best, it aims to present various perspectives that should be considered.
When should founders choose between LLPs and Companies? As soon as their business idea is validated.
The comparison chart outlines various factors, including Applicable Law, Charter Documents, Number of Partners/Members, Liability of Partners/Members, Legal Entity, Key Managerial Personnel, Board and Shareholders Meetings, Preparation of Minute Book, Maintenance of Statutory Registers, Conversion, Directorship/Partnership, Audit, Withdrawal of Capital, Management, Taxability of Dividend, Employee Stock Options Plans, Funding, and Listing.
Investors are usually more willing to invest in a business vehicle set up as a Company. Shares are of two types; equity and preference. Equity shareholding provided to investors gives them a percentage share in the equity of the Company. The more the share, the more control investors as equity shareholders will have. Private companies can list their shares on the stock exchange and convert into a public limited company, subject to provisions of the Companies Act and SEBI Regulations.
Whether to set up a Private Limited Company or LLP?
Incorporating a business involves several important decisions, including the choice of a business vehicle. Two popular vehicles are Limited Liability Partnerships (LLPs) and Private Limited Companies. This article aims to help founders choose between these two vehicles by providing a comparison chart that outlines the characteristics of each. Although the article doesn’t provide a definitive answer as to which vehicle is best, it aims to present various perspectives that should be considered.
When should founders choose between LLPs and Companies? As soon as their business idea is validated.
Comparison Chart: LLP vs. Company
The following table briefly compares the characteristics of the two business vehicles and helps you make a decision based on what factors are most crucial for your business:
Memorandum and Articles of Association and certificate of incorporation.
Number of Partners/Members
Minimum – 2 Maximum – No limit
Minimum – 2 Maximum – 200
Liability of Partners / Member
Limited – indicating partners will not be personally liable for any debts of the LLP
Limited – indicating members will not be personally liable for any debts of the company
Legal Entity
Yes, can sue or be sued in the name of LLP
Yes, can sue or be sued in the name of the Company
Need to Appoint a key managerial person/Company Secretary
No
No, unless applicable
Board Meetings
Depends on the procedure prescribed in the LLP agreement
Mandatory, at least four (4) in every year
Shareholders Meeting
Not applicable
Mandatory
Preparation of Minute Book
Depends on the procedure prescribed in the LLP Agreement
Mandatory
Maintenance of Statutory Registers
LLP is not required to maintain any Registers, Records and Minutes unless specifically mandated by LLP Agreement. The partners are at liberty to decide the requirements.
A Company is required to maintain various Registers, Records and to Minutes of Board Meetings and General Meetings from time to time irrespective of doing business.
Conversion
Can be converted into a Company
Can be converted into LLP or any other class of Companies subject to certain restrictions as per the Act.
Directorship / Partnership
Foreign national can be a partner in the LLP subject to FEMA Regulations
Foreign national can be a Director in the Company.
Audit
LLP is required to get their accounts audited only if their annual turnover exceeds INR 40 Lakhs or capital contribution exceeds INR 25 Lakh
All Companies are required to get their accounts audited annually.
Withdrawal of capital
Partners can withdraw capital subject to LLP agreement. It is also possible for a partner to reduce contribution liability after giving notice to creditors.
Once paid up, capital cannot be withdrawn by shareholders without the approval of the court. Companies can buy back the shares subject to provisions of the Companies Act or transfer shares to others.
Management
LLP is managed by partners as per LLP agreement. Partners can delegate management power to a management team or single partner
Management of Company is vested with Board of Directors elected by shareholders
Taxability of Dividend in the hands of partner / shareholder
Profit distributed by an LLP is completely exempted in the hands of a partner.
Dividend from a Company up to INR 10 Lakhs is exempted in the hands of a shareholder. Dividend in excess of ₹10 Lakhs shall be taxable at 10% in the case of a resident individual/Firm.
Employee Stock Options Plans for attracting Employees
Not Applicable
Companies can issue Employee Stock Options Plans.
Funding
LLP cannot raise equity funding, as there is no concept of shareholding in an LLP. Investors would have to be provided an interest in the LLP, often through becoming partners in the LLP Agreement.
Private companies are preferred for external funding since shares can be issued against funds received (explained in detail below)
Listing
An LLP cannot ‘go’ public, in the sense that it cannot be listed on a stock exchange, which many investors view as a mode to exit from their interest in the entity.
Private companies can list their shares on the stock exchange and convert into a public limited company subject to provisions of Companies Act & SEBI Regulations
Comparison Chart: LLP vs. Company
Funding preference:
Investors are usually more willing to invest in a business vehicle set up as a Company, since through certain arrangements (between the investors, founders and companies) the investors are able to gain the right to ‘control’ their investment. Investors are provided shares in the Company for their investment. To protect their investment, Indian laws allow freedom to the Company to structure share issue and allotment to investors in a manner that is mutually beneficial to both. The investors gain important rights such as the right to vote on certain business decisions, appoint their nominee directors on the board of the Company, gain access to sensitive financials and financial information of the Company.
Shares are of two types; equity and preference. Equity shareholding (if) provided to investors gives them a percentage share in the equity of the Company. The more the share, the more control investors as equity shareholders will have.
However, if the investment by the investors provides them a lion’s share in the equity of the Company, the founders who started the business may not have any interest in running the business itself, as their proportional ownership of the shares is not as high as it was before the investment was made. E.g.: An investor may invest INR ‘x’ in the equity share capital of the Company, taking the equity ownership of the founders down from 90% to 50%. To counter such situations, Companies are allowed to issue preference share capital to investors. Investors may still invest the same amount, however, the founders do not lose their stake in the equity of the company post investment. Preference shares can be issued in a manner that allows the investors to either be paid; i) dividends before equity shareholders; ii) interest payments; iii) right to convert to equity at a future date at a pre-determined value and other such superior rights in a Company.
Business: Product or Service?
An equally important consideration to keep in mind is the business itself. Businesses are of primarily two types: those that offer products or provide services.
Products mostly adhere to a standard that is common for all, i.e. for those that sell it and for those that buy it (think of wallets – to keep your money in, uber – a product to hail rides, Zomato – a product providing restaurant listing services). Its easier to scale production with an increase in availability of resources. In such cases, a private limited company could be a better option.
Services, on the other hand, are a customized offering to the customers/market of a startup, and are dependent on the manual labour and inputs of a professional (think a marketing, advertising, legal or finance firm). Services mostly depend on professionals and need to be customized progressively more when offering the services to a larger market, i.e. scalability is a challenge. LLP structures are more suited in such cases.
Therefore, you’d have to know the nature of your business, which if considered in the manner just stated, is an easier choice to make – and helps deciding whether to choose either a Company, or an LLP as the preferred business vehicle.
SaaS is an interesting category, which would depend on how customized or standardized the software itself needs to be. Moreover, at Treelife we have observed that often a SaaS could start out as a service, but as the business itself matures/grows, it could take on the nature of a product. For example, a startup could enter into agreements which allow their offering to be tailored to a specific need, but later on could diversify the same offering for a larger market.
We hope that this analysis into the nature of the business, funding preferences and the comparative features of the two structures, mentioned above, would help you in deciding between setting up a private limited company or LLP!
The Ministry of Finance has notified an amendment in Prevention of Money-Laundering Act, 2002 (“Act”) by way of Notification No. S.O. 1072(E) dated 07.03.2023 (“Notification”). The Act has been amended to include cryptocurrency or virtual digital assets (“VDA”) transactions within its scope. This means that certain transactions are now subject to the provisions of the Act.
The amendment shall be applicable to the following entities:
(a) exchange between virtual digital assets and fiat currencies;
(b) exchange between one or more forms of virtual digital assets;
(c) transfer of virtual digital assets;
(d) safekeeping or administration of virtual digital assets or instruments enabling control over virtual digital assets; and
(e) participation in and provision of financial services related to an issuer’s offer and sale of a virtual digital asset.
If a company falls under the above mentioned categories they are considered to be Virtual Assets Service Providers (“VASPs”) and are required to follow various reporting requirements.
Reporting Requirements
Verifying Identity: Under section 11A of the Act, every reporting entity shall verify the identity of its clients and the beneficial owner, by:
authentication under section 2(c) of the Aadhaar (Targeted Delivery of Financial and Other Subsidies, Benefits and Services) Act, 2016, if the reporting entity is a banking company;
offline verification under the Aadhaar (Targeted Delivery of Financial and Other Subsidies, Benefits and Services) Act, 2016;
use of passport issued under section 4 of the Passports Act, 1967; and
use of any other officially valid document or modes of identification as may be notified by the Central Government on this behalf.
Records Maintenance: Under section 12 of the Act,
Every reporting entity shall:
maintain a record of all transactions as to enable it to reconstruct individual transactions (for 5 years from the date of the transaction);
furnish to the Director, information relating to such transactions, whether attempted or executed, the nature and value of which may be prescribed; and
(iii) maintain record of documents evidencing identity of its clients and beneficial owners as well as account files and business correspondence relating to its clients (for 5 years after the business relationship between a client and the reporting entity has ended).
Every information maintained, furnished or verified, shall be kept confidential.
Conclusion
It can be therefore concluded that, the activities of any company who is just a marketplace or an aggregator of VDAs would not fall within the purview of this amendment. However, if a company engages in activities related to the buying and selling of VDAs, such as processing transactions, offering VDAs for sale, making purchase offers, or providing financial services related to them, it will be considered a reporting entity. In our view, advisory services or other non-financial services which do not include any actual facilitation of payments/ sale would not be covered under the ambit of the amendment. However, if a reporting entity engages in such activities, it must comply with the above mentioned requirements.
In this blog, we will discuss the reasons why investors ask companies to issue preference shares during their funding rounds. We’ll also cover what preference shares are, their features, and their types.
Section 43 of the Companies Act, 2013 states that
(ii) “preference share capital‘‘, with reference to any company limited by shares, means that part of the issued share capital of the company which carries or would carry a preferential right with respect to— (a) payment of dividend, either as a fixed amount or an amount calculated at a fixed rate, which may either be free of or subject to income-tax; and
(b) repayment, in the case of a winding up or repayment of capital, of the amount of the share capital paid-up or deemed to have been paid-up, whether or not, there is a preferential right to the payment of any fixed premium or premium on any fixed scale, specified in the memorandum or articles of the company;
(iii) capital shall be deemed to be preference capital, notwithstanding that it is entitled to either or both of the following rights, namely: —
(a) that in respect of dividends, in addition to the preferential rights to the amounts specified above, it has a right to participate, whether fully or to a limited extent, with capital not entitled to the preferential right aforesaid;
(b) that in respect of capital, in addition to the preferential right to the repayment, on a winding up, of the amounts specified above, it has a right to participate, whether fully or to a limited extent, with capital not entitled to that preferential right in any surplus which may remain after the entire capital has been repaid.”
From the above definition, we can understand that Preference Shares are those shares that are given priority over other equity shares. Preference Shares are held by preference shareholders who get the right to receive the first payouts in case the company decides to pay its investors any dividends. Another way to understand preference shares is those shares whose shareholders have the right to claim dividends during the lifetime of a company. The same shareholders also can claim repayment of capital in case the company is wound up or liquidated. These shares combine the characteristics of debt and equity both.
Preference shares are given priority over other equity shares and are held by preference shareholders who receive the first payouts in case the company pays its investors any dividends. These shares also provide a preferential right to claim dividends during the lifetime of a company and the repayment of capital if the company is liquidated. The features of preference shares:
Dividend payouts: Preference shares allow holders to receive dividend payouts when other stockholders may not receive any dividends or receive them later. The payouts can be fixed or floating based on the interest rate benchmark.
Preference in assets: When the company is liquidated or wound up, preference shares get priority over non-preferential shareholders when claiming the company’s assets.
Voting rights: Preference shares generally do not carry voting rights, but preference shareholders may be allowed to vote in specific events that directly affect their rights as holders of preference shares.
Convertibility: Preference Shares can be converted into ordinary equity shares. They are typically converted into a predetermined number of non-preference shares after certain trigger events.
Types of preference shares:
Convertible preference shares: Convertible Preference Shares allow shareholders to convert their Preference Shares into equity shares at a fixed rate after a specified period.
Non-convertible preference shares: These shares cannot be converted into equity shares and only receive fixed dividend payouts.
Redeemable preference shares: Redeemable Preference Shares can be repurchased or redeemed by the company at a fixed rate and date.
Irredeemable preference shares: Irredeemable Preference Shares cannot be redeemed during the company’s lifetime.
Participating preference shares: These shares allow shareholders to demand a part in the surplus profit of the company at the event of liquidation after the dividends have been paid to other shareholders.
Non-participating preference shares: These shares only offer fixed dividends and do not provide shareholders with the additional option of earning dividends from the surplus profits earned by the company.
The prime reason investors ask for Preference Shares is the security it offers them, especially when investing in early-stage startups. Preference Shares provide a participating liquidation preference that grants the investor a right to receive its funds in a liquidation event, with the balance of the proceeds being shared ratably amongst the holders of the equity shares and Preference Shares. In a non-participating liquidation preference, the preference holder will receive its predetermined returns, but will not receive any portion of the remaining proceeds.
FACTS:
Startup- ABC Private Limited
Investor-XYZ Ventures,
Investment amount: USD 5 million for 20 percent of the equity in the Startup with a predetermined liquidation preference of 1x of the Investment Amount. (this typically ranges from 1x to 1.5x depending on the deal size)
Liquidation Event Proceeds = USD 100 million
As per Non-participating Liquidation Preference, XYZ Ventures will have the option to take the greater of USD 5 million or 20 percent of USD 100 million. Here, XYZ Ventures will opt for the latter and take away USD 20 million;
As per the Participating Liquidation Preference, XYZ Ventures will have the right to take USD 5 million first and then partake 20% in the remaining USD 95 million as well. This totals the aggregate amount of return to XYZ Ventures to USD 24 million (USD 5 million + 20% of USD 95 million).
In practice, an event of liquidation is not limited to “winding up”, under the Companies Act, 2013. It usually includes any merger or consolidation of the company in which its shareholders do not retain a majority of the voting power in the surviving entity, the sale of all or substantially all of the company’s assets, and any other transaction constituting a change of control or even an initial public offer.
If the company has to be wound up, then to ensure the protection of their money, an investor would prefer to have preferential rights at the time capital is repaid. Here, preference shareholders have an edge over equity shareholders. The priority of repayment in the course of winding up is statutorily prescribed, such that shareholders may be repaid only after all outstanding liabilities of the company have been discharged. The Companies Act, 2013 provides that, with regard to capital, Preference Shares carry or will carry on winding up or repayment of capital a preferential right to be repaid the amount of the capital paid up or deemed to have been paid up, whether or not there is a preferential right to the payment of either or both of the following amount: (i) any dividend remaining unpaid up to the date of winding up or repayment of capital; and (ii) any fixed premium or premium on any fixed scale, specified in the company’s charter documents.
An investment agreement usually includes provisions that provide an assured exit to the investors at a fixed return post a specified period. However, the need for liquidation preference protection arises in scenarios where a liquidation event takes place prior to the investor being provided an exit. In such a case it is essential that the investor receives a return on its investment and such a clause is included in an investment agreement.
Anti-dilution –
Another practical benefit of preference shares is that they provide ‘down round’ protection to the investor. In India, the two commonly used forms of anti-dilution protection are: (a) Full Ratchet and (b) Broad-Based Weighted Average.
A Preference Shareholder has the option to require the company to protect its interest in the event the company issues shares in the subsequent rounds at a price lower than the price of the investor’s share. This is achieved by conversion of the existing Preference Shares of the investor into such number of equity shares, or by issuing a further number of Preference Shares to the company at a lower value, such that the shareholding percentage of the investor does not take a hit.
Dividends –
“The first rule in investing: don’t lose any money. The second rule: don’t forget the first rule!” as quoted by Warren Buffet on an occasion.
Since the prime reason for all investments is returns, it is only prudent to investigate the nature of the instrument in respect of returns. While most investments are done looking at the returns being received via the enhanced value of the shares at the time of exit, it is also prudent to also look at dividends.
A Preference Share gives a preferential right in regard to dividends under the Companies Act, of 2013. An interesting fact is that the provision relating to Preference Shares under the Companies Act only contemplates the payment of a fixed amount or an amount calculated at a fixed rate, in preference to the equity shareholders of a company. The provision does not mention the time period within which a dividend has to be paid. Therefore, the investor is free to contractually require the company to pay not only a dividend in preference to other shareholders but also to require the company to pay a dividend on a year-on-year basis, rather than as and when declared.
Conclusion
The characteristics and the understanding of how Preference Shares are beneficial to the investors lead us to conclude that Preference Shares are a perfect mechanism to protect the interest of the investors who are making an investment in startups and taking on the risk associated with such investments.
We can conclude that the liquidation preference that these Preference Shares provide to the investors (which is incorporated in the investment agreements in the language acceptable to the investor) becomes one of the prime reasons for them asking for Preference Shares.
However, dividends and anti-dilution are also equally important factors. Dividends are primarily important because investors are majorly interested in protecting cash flows through dividends than returns.
Based on the above discussion we can conclude a Preference Share can be customized to the needs of the investor, making Preference Shares a more attractive solution for investments than equity or debt. However, it is always advisable for investors to invest in a few equity shares as well in order to maintain their voting rights.
How to Understand Intellectual Property Rights in Employment?
Intellectual Property is any creative work or invention of the mind and it belongs to the person who created it unless it is stated otherwise in a predetermined contract. In the case of employment, the employer may own or have assigned rights over the intellectual property that an employee creates during the employment period, if his signed employment contract says so. But, the employee still has original rights over the work they created and can claim them later after leaving the company which may lead to confusion and potential dispute. Therefore, it is essential to include terms related to the ownership of intellectual property in employment contracts, independent contractor agreements, or consultant and designer agreements.
What falls under Intellectual Property Rights?
Intellectual property includes inventions, designs, literary and artistic works, trademarks (symbols, and images) used in commerce. There are nine categories of intellectual property such as copyrights, trademarks, patents, designs, geographical indications, trade secrets, and more. Some key attributes of IPRs are that they are intangible assets, creations of the mind, and entail negative rights which means the owner can exclude others from using their property.
Under the employment scene, the most common IPRs are industrial designs, copyrights, trademarks, inventions and patents, trade secrets, and more. Protection of intellectual property is crucial, as employees have access to the business’s internal and pre-existing codes, models, and systems. Employees can leak or steal data and share it with competitors. Therefore, it is essential to protect IPRs from being stolen or leaked from the company.
Ownership of IPR in Employment
As per common practice and industry standards, the employer owns the intellectual property an employee creates during their employment, since the employer invests in the employee in terms of salary and providing infrastructure and basic resources which enables the employee to create such work product and IP. However, no blanket rights are granted to employers, and there are some factors to consider while resolving any dispute related to the ownership of intellectual property rights in employment.
Ordinarily, the employment agreement signed by the employee at the time of agreeing to work with the employer will detail out the IP rights and which party will retain ownership in the work product consisting of such IP and for how long. Including clauses about confidentiality in employment contracts or commercial relationships between the parties can also help to protect intellectual property. If there is no pre-existing agreement defining terms of ownership of IPR between employee and the employer, the employee can assign his rights in the IP by executing an assignment deed at a subsequent stage in favour of the employer, based on mutual understanding.
By including clear clauses in employment contracts or other written agreements, employers can define title to seek protect their IPRs and prevent any legal disputes regarding ownership.
Understanding Intellectual Property Rights in Employment: Key Factors and Agreements
In India, the ownership of Intellectual Property (IP) rights can vary under different IP laws. Copyright law states that the creator or author is the first owner of copyright, and patents law says that the inventor is the first owner. The Designs Act, 2000, mandates a procedure for the assignment of designs similar to patent assignments. Trademarks are the property of the registered proprietor. However, there is no current domestic legislation protecting trade secrets or confidential information. Hence, disputes may arise between employers and employees regarding ownership rights, which can be resolved by including clear terms in employment contracts for how employee-developed IP will be dealt with.
Key Factors to Decide Ownership in IPR
Statutory Provisions – The ownership rights of IP will be decided according to clear legal provisions specified in law.
Contract of Service – The employer must pay salary to the employee for work done under a contract of service, and the employer can claim the ownership of IP if provided in the employment contract.
Agreement for IP Ownership – An intellectual property assignment agreement between the employer and employee specifies the ownership of IP in different situations. This agreement solves the ownership issue with respect to the IP created during the employment, especially if terms of ownership are not contemplated in the employment agreement itself.
Nature of Work – If there is no statutory provision, the nature of work that the employee is engaged in can decide the ownership of the IP created during the employment. If any IP is created by the employee in connection with work profile and part of his day-to-day functions, then it belongs to the employer unless there is a contrary contractual understanding.
Agreements to Execute Between Employer and Employee to Avoid Disputes
Employment Agreement
It is recommended to execute a detailed and exhaustive employment agreement at the time of hiring an employee that mentions the ownership of IP generated during the course of employment. Confidentiality and Intellectual Property Assignment clauses, and governing law clauses can be included.
Intellectual Property Assignment Agreement
If the employer wants to acquire the IP created by an employee that does not fall under the employee’s nature of work and IP that doesn’t get owned by the employer automatically, an IP Assignment Agreement can be executed subsequently with proper terms and conditions.
Conclusion
Employers need to protect their IP, but they cannot always be the deemed owner of IP created by an employee during the employment. With proper contracts between the employer and the employee, the risks associated with the ownership of IP can be mitigated. To avoid disputes, terms and conditions of ownership of IP created during the employment must be executed on paper, and a lawyer can help dilute the prospective risk of tussles for ownership rights.
Starting a business involves risks, and it is important to take precautionary steps to safeguard your investment. One of these steps includes drafting a Co-Founders Agreement, especially if your startup is co-founded by more than one person. This agreement lays down the terms and conditions between co-founders and helps navigate their day-to-day operations, resolve any disputes that may arise, and clarify profit-sharing and intellectual property rights. Here are some key clauses that should be part of your Co-Founders Agreement to ensure smooth operation of your business:
Capital Contribution: Clearly state the contribution that each co-founder will make to the company, the percentage of total capital held by each of them, and the form and manner of the contribution.
Roles and Responsibilities: Describe each co-founder’s roles and responsibilities in the company and assign specific decision-making responsibilities.
Transfer of Shares: Clearly state any restrictions on the transferability of shares held by the founders, including lock-in of shares, vesting of shares, and right of first refusal.
Non-Compete: Incorporate a non-compete clause to protect the business and the interests of other founders. The clause should clearly state that founders are not eligible to engage in activities that conflict with the objectives of the business while they are part of the company and for a certain number of years post-exit.
Confidentiality: Incorporate a confidentiality clause to protect the business’s know-how, client information, pricing, and future strategies, among other things.
Intellectual Property: Ensure that all intellectual property developed during the course of the business is owned by the business and not by any individual co-founder.
Exit Process: Clearly state the manner to be adopted and the exit mechanism in case any co-founder is removed from the company or wants to exit voluntarily.
Dispute Resolution: Provide a clear mechanism for the resolution of deadlocks or conflicts that may arise between the co-founders, such as arbitration.
Compensation: Determine the compensation to be paid to each co-founder and state the profit-sharing mechanism.
Voting Matters and Governance: Address any voting matters and governance issues to ensure smoother decision-making in the long run.
Incorporating these clauses into your Co-Founders Agreement can help build a long-lasting and successful relationship between co-founders and lead to the ultimate success of your business.
As the famous quote by Shakespeare goes, “What’s in a name?” Well, in today’s world, a lot! With businesses fighting for exclusivity and originality in their names, it has become crucial to protect your brand through Trademark registration. A Trademark, according to Section 2 of the Trade Marks Act, 1999, is a mark that distinguishes the goods and services of one company from another. It can be anything from a symbol to a label or a logo.
Trademark registration provides legal rights to the owner to use the name, logo, symbol, etc., as the identity of their business. It also helps customers associate your brand name with your product/service, creating a strong consumer base. For instance, Cadbury is a multinational company known for its milk chocolates. Still, due to its unique and widely used name, people interchangeably use Cadbury to refer to a basic milk chocolate.
In India, the Ministry of Commerce & Industry, Controller General of Patents, Designs, and Trade Marks, and Indian Government regulate Trademark Registration. Before initiating the registration process, it is essential to keep the following crucial aspects in mind:
What can be trademarked?
Understand what can be trademarked and what cannot. You can trademark a wordmark, device mark or logo, unique sound mark associated with your brand, or a new color/shade of color.
Which are the types of Trademarks?
Goods marks and Service marks are the two broad categories for trademarks. There are also Product marks, which are marks on products or goods, and Service marks to register services. The applicant needs to choose the appropriate class from the notified classification to register a Trademark according to the nature of its products/service provided.
Choose a mark that is protective
Choose a unique and easily identifiable mark that protects your brand from infringement. Ensure that your mark is not too common or generic or directly descriptive of your product/service, leading to issues arising due to its similarity with common words or other brand names or logos.
Check for similar marks and the availability of the chosen mark in the specific class
Running a preliminary search in the database to check for any similar trademarks in the same class is crucial to avoid rejection of the Trademark application.
The cost involved
The cost of filing a Trademark application varies based on the type of entity applying for the mark. It is advisable to renew the registration before the lapse of ten years; otherwise, the mark will be considered abandoned and can be applied for by someone else.
Trademark registration is an efficient tool to gain a competitive edge over other businesses of similar nature. Apart from providing a unique identity, filing for your Trademark comes with a package of advantages that can be beneficial for the business in the long run. These include a greater brand image, product differentiation, identity, and most importantly, legal protection against infringement.
If you need any legal assistance in Trademark Registration, Treelife Consulting is a one-stop solution for you. Contact us for more information.
In the start-up ecosystem, equity distribution is a crucial aspect of wealth creation and value generation. With such importance on the valuation aspect, stakeholders are continuously looking for varied structures to define equity distribution of the company. As such, founders must strike a balance between controlling costs and distributing equity. Although equity distribution has no fixed principles, industry practices offer some broad structures that founders can follow. This post answers frequently asked questions about equity dilution, which is one of the most critical aspects of a start-up.
What is dilution of equity?
Equity dilution means the reduction of a shareholder’s percentage of ownership in the company as new shareholders are added. Consider a company as a piece of land where two shareholders or founders share the land. Then you bring on board an advisor and an ESOP pool is also created.,the founders will have to share the same land with them, reducing the founders’ percentage of ownership. When new investors come in, they will have to share the same land too. The same principle applies to a company, as new shareholders come in, the founders’ share in the company gets reduced. The reduction of your space/ percentage of shareholding as a shareholder is termed as dilution of equity.
What is primary sale vs. secondary sale?
This question often comes across that founders are skeptical about giving away their shares when anyone wants a piece of the company. To address this issue, it’s important to understand two primary concepts – primary and secondary sale.
Primary Sale – Primary sale happens when an investor invests money in a company and seeks new shares to be allotted from the company. In primary investment, everyone gets diluted in proportion to their shareholding unless special conditions are mentioned.
Secondary Sale – Secondary sale, on the other hand, occurs when the investor is looking to buy already existing shares of the founder or any other existing shareholders by paying money directly to them. There is no dilution or change in the share of other parties, except the buyer and seller.
How does it work?
Every company has 100% shares, and the number of shares can be increased based on the ratio to post-investment.
For example, if two founders (founder A and B) hold 5,250 shares each with a 50% controlling interest in the company, and an investor comes in with an investment of $1 million considering the pre-money valuation of $3 million, the number of shares will increase based on the ratio to post-investment. In this case, 25% (1Mn/4Mn). The post-investment round will dilute the holding of the founders, reducing their controlling interest from the original hold.
How much to dilute?
The amount of dilution depends on the stage of the business and other factors. Too much dilution can be a concern for future incoming investors, while too little is concerning to investors as they should have skin in the game. The ultimate goal is to grow the business, so even if the dilution numbers are skewed from the expected dilution, the growth of the business is the primary concern.
Pre-money vs. post-money Valuation
Pre-money valuation is the value of the company before it receives the investment amount, while Post-money valuation is the value of the company after it receives the investment amount. Investors offer equity based on pre-money valuation, but the percentage sought is based on the post-money valuation.
Post Money Valuation = Pre Money Valuation + Investment Amount
In conclusion, understanding equity dilution and the cap table is a pertinent metric of fundraising and talking to investors. We often see founders neglect it due to a lack of clarity of these concepts. A grasp on these concepts enables the founder to have better control of the shareholding.
A Term Sheet is a non-binding document outlining the basic terms and conditions under which an investment will be made. It is essentially a brief understanding between the founders and the potential investor(s). The document summarizes the key points of the commercial agreement set by both parties, before actually executing the definitive agreement(s) and initiating the time-consuming due diligence. The primary purpose of executing a term sheet is for both parties to concur on the important terms by means of negotiations. Typically, the negotiations for term sheet(s) are not long and the number of iterations between the parties is limited.While term sheets vary for different companies, investors, and even between rounds, there are a few essential terms that should be kept in mind in any fundraising round as they are crucial and most importantly, negotiable. What is a term sheet? How to draft a term sheet for investment? What are the key clauses in a term sheet? What is a non-binding term sheet? What is the format of a term sheet for venture capital? Here is a comprehensive guide to understanding term sheets for startup with a term sheet template that covers all the essential clauses.A term sheet is a document that outlines the terms and conditions of an investment deal, including the rights and obligations of the parties involved. It serves as a blueprint for the investment transaction and helps both parties to negotiate and finalize the details of the investment.The format of a term sheet for venture capital investment usually includes the following sections:
Company details, including name, address, and incorporation date
Investment details, including the amount, type of security, and valuation (if applicable)
Management and board control, including the appointment of directors
Liquidation preference, outlining how the proceeds of a sale or liquidation will be distributed
Employee Stock Option pool, which is a percentage of the company’s equity reserved for employee stock options
Pre-emptive rights, which allow the investors to maintain their ownership percentage by subscribing to new shares issued by the company
A non-binding term sheet signifies that the terms are subject to further negotiation and are not legally binding. This allows the parties to negotiate without the fear of being contractually bound.While drafting a term sheet, it is essential to seek legal counsel’s assistance to ensure compliance with applicable laws and regulations. Here is a term sheet template that covers all the essential clauses necessary for a successful investment negotiation:
[COMPANY NAME] [DATE]
Investor: _____________________ Investor Address: _____________________Amount of Investment: ______________Type of Security: __________________ Valuation: ______________________Management and Board Control: ________________________Liquidation Preference: _______________________________Anti-Dilution Provisions: ______________________________Option Pool: _______________________________________Pre-emptive rights: __________________________________
This term sheet is non-binding and subject to further negotiation. Any investment will be subject to completion of legal due diligence and the execution of the definitive investment documents.This template serves as a starting point for drafting a term sheet. Ensure that all the terms and clauses are carefully negotiated and drafted to meet the specific needs of the company and the investor.
Exit rights
Achieving a successful exit from a company is the primary goal for most of the financial investors. While there are many routes via which an investor intends to obtain an exit, such as through an IPO, third-party sale or buy-back of their shares, there are other contractual mechanisms available such as a drag-along right and tag-along right which also aid in achieving the desired exit. A ‘drag along’ clause allows the investors to ‘drag’ the other shareholders into a joint sale of their shareholding too. Usually, if the investor is a minority shareholder it may become difficult to find a buyer for such shares, hence the investors usually demand a drag-along right to make the sale attractive for any buyer by offering a significant chunk of shareholding of the company. A tag-along provision is a clause that allows the investors to ‘tag-along with the promoters or group of shareholders if they find a buyer of their shares on the same terms and conditions. The term sheet is an important document and may create issues for the parties involved if it does not correctly reflect what has been agreed on or fails to deal with key terms which may lead to ambiguity and uncertainty over the exact nature of the relationship between the parties.
FAQs
Q: What is the difference between a term sheet and an agreement?
A: A term sheet is a non-binding preliminary document that outlines the basic terms and conditions of a proposed investment or transaction, while an agreement is a legally binding document that formalizes the terms of the transaction.
Q: Who prepares the term sheet?
A: Generally, the lead investor or the investor’s legal counsel prepares the term sheet.
Q: What is the purpose of a term sheet?
A: The purpose of a term sheet is to set out the key terms and conditions of a proposed investment or transaction so that both parties can negotiate and finalize the details of the investment.
Q: What happens after a term sheet is signed?
A: After a term sheet is signed, the parties will move towards preparing legal documentation such as an investment agreement or a shareholder’s agreement.
Q: Is the term sheet legally binding in India?
A: The term sheet is usually non-binding and is intended to serve as a framework for further negotiations. However, some clauses of the term sheet such as confidentiality and exclusivity clauses may be legally binding.
Q: What is the term sheet process?
A: The term sheet process involves negotiation and finalization of the key terms and conditions of an investment or transaction, followed by the preparation of legal documentation.
Q: Who signs a term sheet?
A: Generally, the lead investor, the other investors and the company sign the term sheet.
Q: Do term sheets have signatures?
A: Yes, term sheets are signed by the parties involved to indicate their agreement to the basic terms and conditions outlined in the document.
Q: What is a term sheet for a startup?
A: A term sheet for a startup is a preliminary document that outlines the basic terms and conditions of a proposed investment or transaction. It includes details such as investment amount, valuation, management participation, and liquidation preferences.
Q: How long does it take to make a term sheet?
A: The timeframe for preparation of a term sheet depends on the complexity of the proposed transaction and the negotiation process between the parties.
Q: What are the main clauses of a term sheet?
A: The main clauses of a term sheet include investment details, liquidation preferences, anti-dilution provisions, option pool, pre-emptive rights, board control, and confidentiality clauses.
Q: What is a term sheet in venture capital? What about private equity?
A: A term sheet in venture capital is a preliminary document that outlines the basic terms and conditions of a proposed investment. A term sheet in private equity serves the same purpose as a term sheet in venture capital, but it is specific to private equity transactions.
Corporate finance is a crucial component of any business’s success, as it encompasses the management of a company’s capital structure and funding activities to enhance its value. Corporate finance is closely linked to business decisions that have a financial and monetary impact, serving as a bridge between the capital market and the corporation. In addition to capital investments, corporate finance is involved with cash flow management, accounting, financial statement preparation, and taxation. The ultimate goal of corporate finance is to optimise a company’s value through resource planning and implementation while balancing risk and profitability.
In this article, we will explore the various types of corporate finance and the three pillars that serve as the foundation for this field.
Types of corporate finance
Corporate finance involves numerous techniques to raise capital for a company, which are classified into short-term and long-term financing options.
Short-term corporate finance provides services to a firm for a limited time, usually lasting a few months to a year. This type of financing includes financial lease, trade credit, and accrual accounts.
Long-term corporate finance refers to financial support that is stretched out over a year or more, with minimal interest rates that can be repaid through monthly interest payments. Examples of long-term corporate finance include debentures, bank loans, and flotation.
Three pillars of corporate finance
To understand the fundamentals of corporate finance, it is necessary to understand the three pillars that serve as its foundation.
1. Investments and Capital Budgeting:
This pillar involves planning where to position a company’s long-term capital assets to earn the maximum risk-adjusted returns. This includes determining whether or not to pursue an investment opportunity through rigorous financial analysis. Capital budgeting helps financial decision-makers make educated decisions for projects that involve significant capital expenditures and are expected to last a year or more. Projects of this type may include :
Investing in new equipment, technology and buildings
Upgrading and maintaining current technology and equipment
completing existing building renovation projects
Increasing their workforce
Creating new goods
Developing new markets
2. Capital Financing:
This pillar involves deciding how to finance the capital investments using the company’s stock, debt, or a combination of the two. The value of the ideal blend for the capital structure is kept in mind while making consistent selections. After determining the best financing mix, the principles assist in putting it in place for the long or short term.
3. Dividend and Return of Capital:
This pillar involves determining whether to keep a company’s surplus earnings for future investments and operational needs or to distribute them to shareholders in the form of dividends or share buybacks. The decision must be made with the highest value of the company in mind. Private and public businesses handle dividend choices differently.
FAQ
1. Why is corporate finance important for business? Corporate finance is important as it helps businesses optimize financial resources, make informed decisions, and maximize shareholder value.
2. How does financial planning and analysis impact corporate finance? Financial planning and analysis help companies assess their financial health, make informed decisions, and achieve their financial objectives.
3. What is the role of risk management in corporate finance? Risk management identifies and mitigates potential financial risks, protecting a company’s assets and ensuring stability.
4. How does corporate finance help maximize shareholder value? Corporate finance strategies optimize financial decisions and resource allocation to generate higher returns for shareholders.
CONCLUSION
Corporate financing is critical in any organization, as it helps to maximise wealth distribution and return production. The three pillars mentioned above form the core of corporate finance. By understanding these pillars and the various types of corporate finance, businesses can make informed decisions to optimize their value through resource planning and implementation while balancing risk and profitability.
In the dynamic realm of corporate governance and shareholder relations, navigating the intricacies of shareholder agreements (hereinafter, “SHA”) is paramount for ensuring clarity, fairness, and accountability. Among the myriad provisions that populate these agreements, tag and drag rights stand out as crucial mechanisms that dictate the dynamics of ownership transfer and decision-making within a company. Tag and drag rights, often included in the SHAs of closely held companies and startups, serve as powerful tools for safeguarding shareholder (including investor) interests, facilitating liquidity events, and preserving harmony among stakeholders. Delving into the nuances of tag and drag rights unveils a complex yet essential aspect of corporate governance, offering insights into their mechanisms, implications, and strategic significance for both majority and minority shareholders.
What are Tag and Drag Along Rights in SHA?
At its core, tag (or tag-along) rights and drag (or drag-along) rights are contractual provisions designed to address the potential scenarios where shareholders seek to sell their ownership stakes in a company. These rights play a pivotal role in determining how ownership transfers occur and the extent to which shareholders can protect their interests in such transactions. In essence, the article focuses on comprehending tag and drag rights in an SHA that goes beyond mere contractual clauses; it embodies a deeper understanding of the intricate interplay between shareholder rights, corporate governance, and transactional dynamics.
Importance of Tag and Drag Rights in a Shareholder’s Agreement
An SHA is a legally binding document that outlines the rights, obligations, and protections of shareholders in a company. It is typically entered into when an investor comes on board and will include all the shareholders, often in conjunction with the transaction documents, the company’s articles of association and other governing documents. SHAs are particularly common in closely-held companies, startups, and private companies where the relationship between shareholders is critical and the ownership structure is more fluid.
Tag and drag rights are often critically negotiated when drafting the SHA; here’s why they are crucial:
Protection of Minority Shareholders: Tag-along rights empower minority shareholders by allowing them to join in a sale of the company initiated by majority shareholders. This ensures that minority shareholders have the opportunity to participate in the sale on the same terms and conditions as the selling majority shareholders. Without tag-along rights, minority shareholders could risk being left behind in transactions that significantly impact the company’s ownership and control structures or value.
Facilitating Majority Control: Drag-along rights provide a mechanism for majority shareholders to compel minority shareholders to sell their shares alongside theirs in a sale of the company. This provision is particularly advantageous for majority shareholders seeking to streamline the sale process, overcome potential obstacles posed by dissenting minority shareholders, and maximize the attractiveness of the company to potential buyers. Drag-along rights help ensure that majority shareholders can effectively exercise their control over the company’s ownership.
Clarity on Transfer of Ownership: By including tag and drag rights in an SHA, the parties establish clear rules and procedures for ownership transfers. This clarity helps minimize disputes and uncertainties among shareholders, providing a framework for orderly and efficient transactions. Shareholders can enter into agreements with confidence, knowing that their rights and obligations are clearly defined and protected.
Facilitating Liquidity Events: Tag and drag rights are particularly important in the context of liquidity events such as mergers, acquisitions, or sales of the company. These provisions ensure that all shareholders, regardless of their ownership percentage, have the opportunity to participate in and benefit from such transactions. By facilitating liquidity events, tag and drag rights can enhance the attractiveness of the company to potential investors and buyers, ultimately contributing to its growth and success.
Drag-Along Rights
What are drag-along rights?
A drag-along right allows a majority shareholder (i.e., usually a shareholder holding more than 50% of shares in a company that has voting rights attached) of a company to force the remaining minority shareholders (ie usually a shareholder holding less than 50% of shares in a company that has voting rights attached) to accept an offer from a third party to purchase the whole company.
The majority shareholder who is ‘dragging’ the other shareholders must offer the minority shareholders the same price, terms and conditions that the majority shareholder has been offered. For example, a majority shareholder who holds 75% of the shares in the company who agrees to sell their shares in a share sale to a potential buyer, must offer the same price for the shares to the minority shareholders if they want to ‘drag them along’. A drag-along clause will allow the majority shareholder to ‘drag’ the remaining minority shareholders with them and require them to sell their shares to the potential buyer at the same price, in order to allow the buyer to purchase the entire company.
Why are drag-along rights used?
The aim of drag-along rights is to provide liquidity, flexibility and an easy exit route for a majority shareholder. The majority shareholder’s percentage of shares is variable depending on the company’s ownership mix and the negotiating strength of the shareholders but is normally between 51% – 75%. As many buyers of a target company will want 100% control over the business and rarely agree to allow a minority shareholder to retain a minority share, it would be difficult for a majority shareholder to accept an offer if the minority shareholders are uncooperative and block the sale of a company.
Although drag-along rights are heavily favoured towards investors/majority shareholders by preventing them from being ‘locked in’ to the company, these types of clauses also ensure that minority shareholders are treated the same as the majority shareholder.
How are drag-along rights triggered?
The conditions triggering a drag-along right are usually contained in the SHA and can range from sales transactions such as mergers and acquisitions, or a change of control in the company, to events of default such as the company/founders failing to provide the investors with an exit. Drag rights are powerful tools available to investors to protect their investment and consequently, the construct of the drag-along right is often heavily negotiated. The Treelife team recently did a deep dive into a high profile dispute stemming from an investor’s exercise of drag-along rights, check it out here!
Some shareholders, such as venture capital investors or angel investors, may require that drag-along provisions are conditional and limited, or contain certain exceptions.
Tag-Along Rights
What are tag-along rights?
Tag-along rights are also known as ‘co-sale rights’ are the inverse of drag-along rights. When a majority shareholder sells their shares, a tag-along right will entitle the minority shareholder to participate in the sale at the same time for the same price for the shares. The minority shareholder then ‘tags along’ with the majority shareholder’s sale. Tag-along rights are usually worded to state that if the tag-along procedures aren’t followed then any attempt to buy shares in the company is invalid and won’t be registered.
Why are tag-along rights used?
Tag-along clauses are designed to protect the minority shareholders from being left behind when a majority shareholder decides to sell their shares. If a minority shareholder held 10% of the shares in a company, it would be difficult to sell as most buyers will want 100% of a company. This puts minority shareholders at risk of being forced to sell their shares at a price which is substantially much lower or has no relationship to the actual value of the company. Without tag-along rights, minority shareholders may find that they hold unsalable or devalued shares.
Tag-Along vs Drag-Along Rights : Differences
Tag-along rights and drag-along rights are both provisions found in the SHA that deal with the exit strategy of shareholders, but they offer different benefits to minority shareholders.
Feature
Tag-along Rights
Drag-along Rights
Definition
Option for minority shareholders to sell with majority shareholder
Obligation for minority shareholders to sell with majority shareholder
Benefit to Minority Shareholder
Same price and terms as majority shareholder
None (may be forced to sell even if not ready)
Benefit to Majority Shareholder
None
Ensures clean and complete sale of the company
Power Dynamics
Gives minority shareholder some control over exit strategy
Favors majority shareholder, can force sale
Conclusion
In conclusion, understanding tag and drag rights in an SHA is essential for navigating the complexities of ownership transfers and corporate governance in closely-held companies and startups. These provisions, while seemingly technical in nature, carry significant implications for shareholder rights, company valuation, and transactional dynamics. By empowering minority shareholders with tag-along rights and enabling majority shareholders to streamline ownership transfers through drag-along rights, these provisions strike a delicate balance between protecting minority interests and facilitating majority control.
In addition to their role in protecting shareholder interests, tag and drag rights also contribute to the clarity, certainty, and efficiency of ownership transfers within the company. By establishing clear rules and procedures for transactions, these provisions help minimize disputes, uncertainties, and potential disruptions to the company’s operations. Furthermore, tag and drag rights facilitate liquidity events such as mergers, acquisitions, or sales of the company, enhancing the company’s growth prospects and value proposition for investors and stakeholders.
As companies continue to evolve and grow, the importance of tag and drag rights in SHAs cannot be overstated. By comprehensively understanding these provisions and their implications, shareholders can navigate ownership transfers, preserve shareholder value, and foster a conducive environment for sustainable growth and success within the company. Ultimately, tag and drag rights serve as cornerstones of effective corporate governance, ensuring fairness, transparency, and accountability in shareholder relations.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) on Tag Along and Drag Along Rights
What are tag-along rights in a shareholder’s agreement?
Tag-along rights allow minority shareholders to join in a sale of the company initiated by majority shareholders, ensuring they can participate in the sale on the same terms and conditions.
What are drag-along rights and why are they important?
Drag-along rights empower majority shareholders to compel minority shareholders to sell their shares alongside theirs in a sale of the company, streamlining the process and maximizing the company’s attractiveness to potential buyers.
What role do tag and drag rights play in facilitating liquidity events?
Tag and drag rights facilitate liquidity events such as mergers, acquisitions, or sales of the company, enhancing the company’s growth prospects and value proposition for investors and stakeholders.
Why are tag and drag rights important for effective corporate governance?
Tag and drag rights serve as cornerstones of effective corporate governance, ensuring fairness, transparency, and accountability in shareholder relations while balancing minority interests with majority control.
Strategic investments are made by parties who are not looking for an immediate financial return but instead want to influence the company so they can reap future benefits. These investors are typically called “strategic investors.” They can be individuals, families, venture capitalists, or other companies which can derive strategic value.
What they have in common is that they’re not after a quick buck; they’re interested in the company’s long-term success and are willing to invest time and resources to help it grow.
This investment model requires a well-thought-out strategy and a solid legal understanding by both parties. That said, here are five elementary things founders and investors must be mindful of during strategic investments.
1. Founder Veto Rights
As a founder, it’s crucial to retain the right to veto any significant decisions regarding the startup. This should include decisions such as major hiring and firing, altering the company’s vision, and changes in the corporate structure.
As hinted earlier, these investors only chip in for a say in the startup and not total control. This is where founder veto rights come into play. These policies allow the founder(s) to maintain ultimate control of the startup while still enjoying investments from the investor.
Having such policies in place before signing any agreement protects the founders’ vision for the company.
2. Any Business Arrangements Apart From Investments by the Investor
Apart from financial assistance, the investor and the startup can agree to other business arrangements. For example, many investors may offer more than just money to startups by bringing new expertise and connections. But what does this mean for founders?
Founders must first determine if these arrangements can benefit the startup or potentially damage it. A clause that clearly defines the agreement and the investor’s role (and capacity) can help startups avoid problems.
3. Tag-Along Rights in Case the Investor is Exiting
‘Tag-along rights’ refer to a contractual agreement between the investor and the startup, which states that if the major investor decides to exit the investment, the other shareholders can leave alongside the investor on similar terms.
This prevents them from being obliged to stay on in a company that may not be profitable anymore. Founders and investors need to negotiate this before entering a deal, as it protects the latter against any unwanted outcomes.
4. Additional Investment Requirement Protocols
It takes time and multiple funding rounds to get a startup on its feet. Thus, in addition to the initial investment, founders and investors should discuss any additional investments that the startup may require going forward.
This prepares both parties as it sets out each party’s obligation regarding further investment in the company upfront. Doing this eliminates any miscommunication or surprises later on and gives existing investors a say in ongoing growth decisions.
It also ensures that the existing investors have some say over any future dilution of their equity due to additional investments. This step is crucial to keep everyone on the same page and maintain lasting investor relationships.
5. If Buy-Out Conditions Need to Be Discussed
Strategic investors must factor in buy-out conditions when investing in a startup. This means discussing with the investor what happens if the startup is acquired by another company.
Founders also need to outline when and how to execute such a transaction. Most importantly, they must determine who will manage such a transaction and agree on specific triggers to meet before this process kicks off.
Further, these details must remain confidential and not be disclosed outside of the transaction. Preferably, seeking legal assistance to ensure that all details are legally binding while remaining fair for both parties is advisable.
These steps will ensure a smooth transition if a buy-out happens during the investment journey.
Wrapping Up
Taking strategic investment can be a boon for startups and VCs, but keeping a few things in mind is important.
Founders should focus on veto rights and consider any other business arrangement an investor offers in addition to the investment itself. They also need to lay down the terms and conditions for future additional investment needs. In the same vein, investors need their ‘tag-long rights’ to protect their bottom line if things go south and clear buy-out conditions if the startup lists for sale.
In a nutshell, strategic investments built on these five pillars will favor both parties and lead to long-lasting relationships.
On September 02, 2022, the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) issued guidelines on digital lending to protect the interests of borrowers and to bring transparency and accountability in the digital lending space. Further, on February 13, 2023, The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) published a set of frequently asked questions (FAQs) on digital lending, which provides guidelines and clarifications on various aspects of digital lending in India. The FAQs cover topics such as the regulatory framework for digital lending platforms, the rights and obligations of borrowers and lenders, data privacy and security, fair practices code, and grievance redressal mechanisms.
Some of the key points covered in the FAQs include that the REs may carry out a portion of the lending process physically. Further, it has been stated that only if a lending transaction qualifies under the definition of ‘Digital Lending’, will a service provider facilitating such lending be designated as LSP. It specifies that insurance charges shall be included in the computation of APR only for the insurance which is linked/integrated with loan products as these charges are intrinsic to the nature of such digital loans. It clarifies that while Payment Aggregators (PA) that do not handle funds flowing from the lender to the borrower are not subject to the Guidelines on Digital Lending, any PA that acts as a Loan Service Provider (LSP) must comply with the Digital Lending Guidelines. In cases of delinquent loans, recovery agents can collect cash from borrowers, and these transactions are exempted from the requirement of direct repayment of the loan in the RE’s bank account. It provides clarity on the fact that confirms that repayment can be allowed from a corporate employer who deducts the EMI amount from the borrower’s salary, but it must be ensured that the repayment is directly from the bank account of the employer to the RE. It notes that exemptions from direct disbursal to the bank account of the borrower can be extended to co-lending arrangements between REs for non-PSL loans subject to the condition that no third party other than the REs in a co-lending transaction should have direct or indirect control over the flow of funds at any point of time.
The Guidelines on Digital Lending apply to all transactions meeting the definition of ‘Digital Lending’ and to digital loans offered over any digital platform that meets the definition of ‘Digital Lending Apps/ Platforms’ (DLAs). The penal interest/charges levied should be based on the outstanding amount of the loan, and the amount under default should act as the ceiling on which the penal charges can be levied. Any cheque bounce or mandate failure charges, which are levied on a per instance basis, need not be annualized but must be disclosed separately in the KFS under ‘Details about Contingent Charges.’
The FAQs also emphasize the importance of transparency and disclosure of terms and conditions, interest rates, and charges, and the need to obtain explicit consent from borrowers before sharing their data with third parties. Additionally, the FAQs guide responsible lending practices, such as assessing the borrower’s creditworthiness and ensuring that the loan amount and repayment terms are reasonable and aligned with the borrower’s income and expenses.
Thrasio, a US-based unicorn, has created a lot of buzz in the startup ecosystem because of its unique operations of buying and scaling up select online brands. Thrasio follows an acquisition-entrepreneurship template, by surfing Amazon’s third-party ecosystem. The company focuses on acquiring Amazon sellers’ businesses and scaling them up, earning $100 million in profit last year. In the startup ecosystem Thrasio’s success is now known as the Thrasio Model.
What is the Thrasio Business Model?
Thrasio’s business model revolves around the fast acquisition of different online businesses from Amazon sellers. The company follows a multi-brand and multi-product strategy, which is consumer-brand-focused. After acquiring the businesses, Thrasio overhauls them by customizing their product portfolio, changing the branding, and developing a long-term revenue growth strategy. Thrasio has over 50 experts working on improving the brand and turning it into a profit-doubling machine.
In the words of Thrasio itself “We don’t optimize, we mastermind ”. Informed by billions of rows of data sourced from hundreds of APIs every day, Thrasio’s teams make the best possible decisions to maximize sales of every product they own and purchase
Even though Thrasio runs the ecommerce business full-time, the previous owner still benefits long-term as they continue to get a percentage of future revenues. Thrasio’s acquisition platform is a win-win for every party involved, as there is a continuous revenue stream for both Thrasio and the previous business owner.
Success of Thrasio
Thrasio was founded by entrepreneurs Carlos Cashman and Josh Silberstein in mid-2018 and have built a business that has been profitable since inception and growing multifold. Thrasio is a digital consumer goods company that acquires other third-party private label Amazon FBA (fulfilment by Amazon) businesses. The company operates by way of acquiring these businesses after which it optimizes the operations of these businesses. This is done in an attempt to expand their reach through the market, develop the product, as well as the supply chain management. This in turn leads to the expansion of the sales, improvement in financial growth and ultimately scales up the business under the umbrella of the acquiring company.
Thrasio’s success reflects in its most recent earnings. The company reported $300 million in revenues and obtained $260 million in public funding, giving it a $1 billion valuation, earning the company unicorn status.
Startup Ecosystem in India
Based on the Thrasio Model’s proven success, many startups in India have adopted this concept for their success and attracted investor interest. These startups have a similar pitch to that of Thrasio, making fast-growing online brand acquisitions and building their portfolio. These startups have their own strategy, offering unparalleled market expertise, a founder-friendly relationship, or guaranteeing media coverage. Funding has been the main activity in this sector in India, with over $300 million invested in Indian startups.
Thrasio is becoming the fastest-growing e-commerce acquisition company worldwide, with its current portfolio comprising 60 Amazon business acquisitions, 6,000 products, and a spot in Amazon’s top 25 sellers’ list. The company has already paid out over $100 million to sellers. The Thrasio Model’s success has been emulated across many startups in India, with each one having a unique strategy for acquisitions and portfolio building.
Thrasio Model: Pros and Cons for Small Businesses
Pros
i. Big cash payouts – these startups pay the businesses money based on the valuation done which usually is much more than they make in a year through their sales in the e-commerce space.
ii. Speedy Exit – for those founders who wish to get an easy, hassle free exit from their businesses, this seems the best bet. The entire process is smooth and quicker as compared to the traditional exit mechanisms and completed within 4-6 weeks.
iii. Legacy and Goodwill – the most important thing any founder could be worried about is the brand image and the goodwill attached. The Thrasio Model focuses on scaling up the acquired businesses and also smoothening the supply chain. With this being the main objective of these startups, the interest of the founders in terms of brand image is protected.
Cons
i. Losing long-term profitability – the most important reason for these startups to acquire smaller businesses is the potential they see in the business. They will make the business reach new heights with their expertise but the founders also lose out on the long term profitability attached to the businesses growth.
ii. Losing your ownership – eventually when the startups functioning with this model purchase controlling stakes in the business, the founders lose their controlling rights in all future operations. The fact that most of these startups work collaboratively with the founders to scale up the business, the founders in that case have negligible say in the operations of the business and are bound by the decisions taken by these startups.
Viability of Thrasio Business Model in Indian Startup Ecosystem
When it comes to implementing the Thrasio Model in India, it’s important to understand that the success of the model depends on numbers. The USA’s large number of brands, even the smallest of which can generate millions of dollars in revenue, makes the Thrasio Model perfect. India, on the other hand, has a smaller online market and many consumers prefer traditional retail markets, which may limit the success of startups using the model in India.
Maintaining the balance between online and offline businesses is critical for success. Startups need to consider acquiring offline-led brands as well to enter the large offline market. Investors should also weigh the risks of entering into deals at extremely high valuations, as it may not be commensurate with the company’s growth.
Investors are contemplating a valuation fight and warning startups of the sameas all startups may approach the same top sellers and have more leverage to command prices. They will then be in the position to command the price as they wish and that’s where the problems begin. The future of these startups based on the Thrasio Model will be determined by what price they buy the brands at, and how they buy them – using equity or debt. Companies usually prefer using debt to fund acquisitions. Using share capital for buyouts results in founders diluting their stake more than needed and is less efficient.
While the Thrasio Model offers many benefits, there are also risks to consider. By understanding both the advantages and disadvantages of this model, small business owners can make an informed decision about their exit strategy.
FAQs on Thrasio Business Model
How does Thrasio identify potential acquisition targets?
Thrasio employs a rigorous evaluation process, considering various factors such as revenue, profit margins, market demand, product quality, and brand potential to identify viable Amazon FBA businesses that align with their acquisition strategy
What happens to the acquired Amazon FBA businesses after Thrasio’s acquisition?
Once acquired, Thrasio integrates the acquired businesses into its operational infrastructure, streamlining processes, enhancing marketing efforts, optimizing supply chains, and implementing data-driven strategies to drive revenue growth and improve profitability.
How does Thrasio monetize the acquired Amazon businesses?
Thrasio generates revenue by leveraging its expertise and resources to scale the acquired businesses. This involves optimizing product listings, implementing marketing campaigns, expanding distribution channels, and driving operational efficiencies to increase sales and profitability.
Our nation will enter a 25-year period wherein India will go from India@75 to India@100. Amrit Kaal marks the blueprint to steer the Indian economy for the upcoming years. The vision for the Amrit Kaal includes technology-driven and knowledge-based economy with strong public finances, and a robust financial sector. The economic agenda for achieving this vision focuses on three things:
Facilitating ample opportunities for citizens, especially the youth, to fulfil their aspirations;
Providing strong impetus to growth and job creation;
Strengthening macro-economic stability
The Budget in Amrit Kaal presented by Hon’ble Finance Minister Smt. Nirmala Sitharaman adopts 7 priorities as ‘Saptarishi’
The Union Budget 2023: Macro Economic Highlights
Green Growth
The Government has proposed to implement many programs for green fuel, green energy, green farming, green mobility, green buildings, and green equipment, and policies for efficient use of energy across various economic sectors. These green growth efforts help in reducing carbon intensity of the economy and provides for largescale green job opportunities. The following key programs have been proposed apart from many other initiatives
PM PRANAM – To incentivize States/ UTs to promote usage of alternative fertilizers
MISHTI – To ensure Mangrove plantation along the coastline
Amrit Dharohar – To implement optimal usage of wetlands
GOBARdhan Scheme – To establish 500 “Waste to Wealth” plants to promote circular economy
Flow of Money in Budget 2023
The Union Budget 2023: Macro Economic Highlights
Economic Growth Indicators
Per Capita income has increased to ` 1.97 lakh pa
GDP growth is estimated at 7%, highest amongst largest economies
The fiscal deficit is estimated to be 5.9% of GDP. The government intending to bring the fiscal deficit below 4.5% of GDP by 2025-26.
Capital Investment outlay increased to INR 10 Lakh Crores. Increase of 33% which is ~ 3.3% of GDP.
Effective capex to be INR 13.7 Lakh crores. ~ 4.5% of GDP
This year around 6.5 crore Income tax returns were filed and nearly 45% of returns were processed within 24 hours. The average processing period reduced from 93 days in financial year 13-14 to 16 days now.
Digital payments has widened by 76% in transactions and 91% in value over the last year.
Savings Scheme Proposals
A new scheme for Women called Mahila Samman Savings Certificate, will be available for 2 year up to March 2025. This will offer deposit upto INR 2 lakh at fixed interest rate of 7.5%.
The deposit limit for Senior Citizen Savings Scheme (SCSS) is proposed to enhanced from 15 lakh to 30 lakh subject to the prescribed conditions. The maximum deposit limit for Monthly Income Account Scheme will be enhanced from 4.5 lakh to 9 lakh for single account and from 9 lakh to 15 lakh for joint account.
Reduction in the TDS rate from 30% to 20% on EPF taxable withdrawal in non-PAN cases.
KYC process will be streamlined and PAN card will be adopted as a single identifier.
Health, Education & Transport initiatives
157 New Nursing colleges to be started
National Digital Library to be for children and adolescents
38,800 teachers to be recruited for the 740 Ekalvya Model Residential schools serving for tribal students
To empower the youth and help the ‘Amrit Peedhi’, the government have formulated the National Education Policy, focused on skilling, adopted economic policies that facilitate job creation at scale, and have supported business opportunities.
50 additional airports, heliports, water aerodromes and advance landing grounds will be revived for improving regional air connectivity.
Highest ever capital outlay of INR 2.4 lakh crores for railways
Other key announcements
A system of ‘Unified Filing Process’ will be set-up by the government to share the information or filed return in simplified forms on a common portal, across the agencies.
An integrated IT portal will be established for investors to reclaim unclaimed shares and unpaid dividends from the Investor Education and Protection Fund Authority.
A one stop solution for reconciliation and updating of identity and address of individuals maintained by various government agencies, regulators and regulated entities will be established using DigiLocker service and Aadhaar as foundational identity.
A Central Processing Centre will be setup for faster response to companies through centralized handling of various forms filed with field offices under the Companies Act.
At present, India is the largest producer and second largest exporter of Millets. Efforts are made to make India a global hub for Millets.
